Home

Terminal Emulation User's Guide (XPe)

1. 0 Black 4 Red 8 Grey 12 Light Red 1 Blue 5 Magenta 9 LightBlue 13 Light Magenta 2 Green 6 Brown 10 Light Green 14 Yellow 3 Cyan 7 White 11 Light Cyan 15 Light White Reflection 4 compatibility Foreground colour ESC 3xm Foreground bold colour ESC 4xm Background colour ESC 5xm Background bold colour ESC 6xm DISPLAY SIZE Number of screen lines ESC 1 p MOUSE CURSOR Mouse cursor style see table below for value ESC 2 p Default Cursor 0 I Beam 4 8 H 1 I 5 7 9 x 2 Ly 6 H 10 No Cursor 3 zk 7 N MOUSE REPORTING IN ALPHANUMERIC APPLICATIONS Arm the emulator for mouse operation ESC arg g where arg is of the format bit7 3 00110 bit 2 when set enables motion events bit 1 when set enables button release events bit 0 when set enables button press events If all bits are cleared then any outstanding arming request is cancelled The mouse remains armed until cancelled When any of the selected events occur the following report format is sent to the host ESC lt Event Type gt lt Button Status gt lt Column gt lt Row gt r Where lt Event Type gt is the event s that caused the report in the same format as the arming sequence C 53 Host Command Summary lt Button Status gt is of the format 00110LMR where LMR indicates which button caused the event lt Column gt and lt Row gt are the alphanumeric position of the mouse REPORTS
2. Return D Field F Page D I Auto Wrap T Auto LF T Auto New Line Terminal ID Model 11 bA OK Cancel Default This dialog box is displayed by selecting IBM 3151 in the Settings menu Operating Mode Factory default Echo The setting of this option determines how keyboard entered data is sent to the host and displayed on the screen In Echo mode keyboard entered data is sent only to the host The host is then responsible for returning the data to the display In Character mode keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the display In Block mode keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host Row and Column Factory default 24 x 80 This option enables you to select one of four display formats 24 rows x 80 columns 25 rows x 80 columns 24 rows x 132 columns 25 rows x 132 columns 6 26 Setup Menus Note that the contents of the display will be cleared when you change the display format Turnaround Char Factory default CR This option specifies the line turnaround character LTC that is generated when a Read command is received or one of the block data transmission keys is pressed Note that selecting DC3 will disable the XON XOFF inbound and outbound pacing characters Forcing Insert Factory default Both This option specifies how an insert command affects displayed da
3. English US SBCS 37 697 37 English UK SBCS 285 697 285 Belgian SBCS 500 697 500 Canadian French SBCS 37 697 37 Danish SBCS 277 697 277 Finnish SBCS 278 697 278 German SBCS 273 697 273 Dutch SBCS 37 697 37 Italian SBCS 280 697 280 Swiss French SBCS 500 697 500 Swiss German SBCS 500 697 500 Swedish SBCS 278 697 278 Norwegian SBCS 277 697 277 French SBCS 297 697 297 Spanish SBCS 284 697 284 Portuguese SBCS 37 697 37 Japanese Kanji Katakana SBCS 290 1172 290 DBCS 300 1001 930 Korean SBCS 833 1173 833 DBCS 834 934 933 Simplified Chinese SBCS 836 1174 836 DBCS 837 937 937 Traditional Chinese SBCS 37 1175 37 DBCS 835 935 935 Hebrew New Code SBCS 424 941 424 Hebrew Old Code SBCS 803 941 424 Thai SBCS 838 1176 838 Greek SBCS 875 925 875 Cyrillic SBCS 880 960 880 Turkish SBCS 1026 1152 1026 Russian SBCS 1025 1150 1025 Czech SBCS 870 959 870 Slovak SBCS 870 959 870 Polish SBCS 870 959 870 Icelandic SBCS 871 697 871 Arabic SBCS 420 697 285 6 40 Setup Menus Notice Board Setup Notice Board Options Lx IV Notice Board Enabled r Zoom Settings Notice Board Above Host Ze Notice Board Below Host WM Copy to F Key Enabled F Key Settings Ze Copy Only User Fields to F Key C Copy All Data to F Key IV Copy Function Enabled IV Single Step Macros Cancel This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Notice Board Setup button in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog
4. gt gt zr gag nmMmMOolow p Ge O En kel e Bh He AE AM r fk CR N lt gt x Seil sdl OO OJ OI NI OO Oil WO ND O N w Les 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 l A B C D E F Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 27 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 ITALIAN CHARACTER SET pl gt fl gt A A Dobvozjzr alco Nell lt c aoa OJ OI InN OO oO AJOIN za Di DI Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 28 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 SPANISH CHARACTER SET J K L M N o P Q R Nell Seil sdl OO OI OI nN OO oO PI WO DN N EI Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 29 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 SWEDISH amp FINNISH CHARACTER SET PI gt i He gt rig 7m mM 0 oloo S Gr OQ a D0 0O0 90 0 2 58 r K cajo NIi lt x Se lt c OJ OON OO oO AI OIN za oO N wo OO O O Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 30 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 BELGIAN
5. gt _ Screen Element Lal BEEE CG E H E _ Flashing FL ba Attribute _ rSample Text Preferences I Flashing FL IV Use Colours I Underline UL I Swap Black White I Inverse 1v I Inverse Colours I Intensity IN I AutoColour I Column Sep C5 I Ansi Colours Disabled E Hidden Hr I Colours Cleared with Attributes E Attributes use Normal BG I Use Italic with Intensity I Use Bold Font This dialog box is displayed by selecting Attributes in the Settings menu It enables you to specify the colours used in the emulation workspace and how text with attributes is displayed To change the way a screen element is displayed select the relevant item from the Screen Element list box for example Bold BD for characters with the bold attribute The settings of the other options in the dialog box will change to reflect the settings currently assigned to the screen element and the Sample Text window will show how the screen element is actually displayed with these settings Text with attributes can be displayed in various ways For example characters with the underline attribute can be displayed as standard e g underlined only as a particular colour only e g green without the underline or with both attribute and a specific colour e g underlined and green The Attribute options allow you to enable or disable any of the attributes normally
6. This table forms the second half of the ANSI 858 character set the first half being the ASCII character set The ANSI 858 character set is used when the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to 858 B 10 Character Sets ANSI 1250 CHARACTER SET as O N m O x e HE eeh O OINI ODO Oo AT OIN Col Ws H Mm m m Cc s o m lt C cC DI 1 D lt 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This table forms the second half of the ANSI 1250 character set the first half being the ASCII character set The ANSI 1250 character set is used when the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to 1250 B 11 Character Sets DG 410 412 WORD PROCESSING MATH amp GREEK ALPHABET CHARACTER SET COLUMN O 00 Zlo oNN Noo Ofna aA a Alo w onv n nj jo o o 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 onoo zk OH P P a Epi Eieizs l ielidioioig z R8 8 XIN gt Nala Sisemaal AP AIZ KMI i mY OT Simi els lx alel Dol al NMNmMm oalk al H m 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DEcimaL 1
7. 2 26 Getting Started Emulator Window Features The Menu Bar The menu bar provides access to a series of commands and dialog boxes which enable you to perform various functions and configure the emulator for compatibility with the application One of three menus may be displayed at any one time These are headed File Edit and Settings Factory Default v Clipboard Text Language D Reset Terminal Clipboard Graphics Lh E Emulation New Connection Open Session Save Session Save Session As Printer Setup aes Print Screen Clear Buffer Serial Print Buffer Auxpott Auto Print Terminal Local Editing Eject Page Block Transmission 5 Attributes Exit Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action Button Tools Note The options available in the menus depend on whether or not you are in WBT mode To display a menu Mouse Click the title of the menu required Keyboard Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined character in the menu title For example pressing Alt F will display the File menu When the menu bar is not displayed you can still display the menus by pressing the following keys Alt F forthe File menu Alt T forthe Edit menu Alt S forthe Settings menu Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete description of all the menu options 2 27 Getting Started The Toolbar A toolbar is displayed
8. B 18 Character Sets WY 60 STANDARD ANSI CHARACTER SET COLUMN O 0 IO nm ololwi pl 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 zk OH gt m N lt x Z lt C A OI 0 O 9 33 OCTAL DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL A m lt IV This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode B 19 Character Sets WY 60 GRAPHICS 1 CHARACTER SET COLUMN O 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 3 8 9 9 156 OCTAL KEY 110 DECIMAL 6E HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode B 20 Character Sets COLUMN WY 60 GRAPHICS 2 CHARACTER SET O 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 zk OH This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode 114 OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL B 21 Character Sets COLUMN WY 60 GRAPHICS 3 CHARACTER SET O 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 114 OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode B 22 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 ENGLI
9. Keyboard Configuration COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES continued EY Aumlaut A or A A famo SEN EN AE diphthong Sg C cedilla feces U E grave E E acute E E circumflex EA E umlaut E o E BR grave l acute I ER circumflex IA CH I umlaut I or I i N tilde N O grave o O acute OI Oo O circumflex o O tilde O l O umlaut O o O O E diphthong OE DEC Multinat in order O slash O Di U grave U U acute U Di U circumflex Un Di U umlaut U o U Glima Y o Y D a grave a l a acute a D a circumflex a E a tilde ai l a umlaut a or a D a ring cee wi a e diphthong we c cedilla E e e grave e l e acute e l e circumflex e D e umlaut e o e GEI i grave i GE i acute d D i circumflex i D i umlaut i or i n tilde n D o grave o 3 7 Keyboard Configuration COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES continued soft syllable hyphen Latin 1 o acute o o circumflex o o tilde O o umlaut Oo or o o e diphthong oe DEC Multinat in order o slash oi u grave u u acute u u circumflex u u umlaut u or u y umlaut y ory Een space pace space ee iets logical not WI Latin
10. Report application name amp version in DEC VT modes ESC 0 1234c C 54 Product Specification Product Specification This appendix describes the level of support provided by each terminal emulation Introduction The following sections describe the level of support provided by each terminal emulation throughout the product range Note that your product version may not support all the terminal emulations listed here General Limitations Key click not supported Badge and Magnetic Card reader support are supported via Wedged data devices connected to the unit s keyboard No downloadable program module The keyboard layouts may differ but substantially provide the same capabilities as the native terminal No screensavers File Transfer protocols not supported on embedded products thin clients API s not supported on embedded products thin clients Smooth Scroll and Variable Scroll rates not supported No graphics or APA graphics Product Specification Telnet Specification Implements RFC 854 855 856 857 858 860 1091 1408 1571 1572 Implements RFC 1205 2877 for IBM 5250 Implements RFC 2355 1576 1646 1647 for IBM 3270 AixTerm Limitations No Vertical tab stops No Select Alternate presentation variant No Select reversed string No Select font in graphic rendition No Virtual terminal commands No Set curses fix No Page scroll No Altern
11. c the colour assigned range 6 m the monochrome attributes assigned 0 Normal Reverse Underline Underline amp reverse Wyse 60 ASCII colour Foreground colour palette Select border colour Background colour Assign foreground colour Assign background colour Assign display attribute to unprotected characters Redefine character attribute association Assign foreground background colours Assign fore background colours to write prot chars Assign foreground colours to write protected chars Assign background colours to write protected chars Assign display attribute to write protected characters Assign replacement character colours amp attributes CURSOR ESC Aa ESC A b ESC Ac ESC Ad ESC Ae ESC Af ESC A g attr f b assoc ESC Ah ESC Ai ESC Aj ESC Ak ESC Al ESC A y f b a Address cursor in current 80 132 column page Address cursor in current 80 column page Address cursor in specific 80 column page Address cursor in specific 80 column window page Address cursor column Address cursor row Autowrap mode off Autowrap mode on Clear all tab stops Clear tab stop Cursor down scroll Cursor left ESC a line R column C ESC line column ESC w page line column ESC win pg line column ESC _ ESC ESCd ESC d ESC 0 ESC 2 or ESC 3 LF BS C 43 Host Command Summary Cursor right FF Cursor up no scroll VT Cursor to start of
12. k Function key number f Function performed All local function keys 0 Factory default 0 F1 or Hold 1 Local function 1 F2 or Print 2 Send key sequence 2 F3 or Set Up 3 Disable key 3 F4 or Session 4 Select modifier key reporting ESC k c k c r k Key number c Control performed All keys 0 Factory default 0 Left Shift 1 Modifier function 1 Right Shift 2 Extended keyboard report 2 Lock key 3 Key disabled 3 Ctrl key 4 Left Alt Function 5 Right Alt Function 6 Left Compose Char 7 Right Compose Char 8 PAGE MEMORY Set lines per page ESC 1t Session Dual Single 3 pages 6 pages 24 2 pages 5 pages 25 2 pages 4 pages 36 1 page 3 pages 48 1 page 2 pages 72 1 page 144 Set left amp right margins Cl left column r right ESC 1 rs Vertical split screen mode L amp R margins can be changed ESC 69h Vertical split screen mode L amp R margins cannot be changed ESC 691 Move cursor to page n at same position ESC n SPP RECTANGULAR AREA OPERATIONS Copy rectangular area ESC t l b r s dt dl dp v t Top line border s Source page number Left column border dt Destination top line border b Bottom line border dl_ Destination left column border r Right column border dp Destination page number Erase rectangular area ESC t l b r z t Top line border b Bottom line border Left column border r Right column border C 13 Host Command Summary
13. 1 When references to keys on the keyboard are shown linked by a plus sign this means that two or more keys have to be pressed at the same time For example press Alt H means press and hold down the Alt key press the F key then release both keys 2 Click means position the mouse pointer over an element on the display then quickly press and release the specified mouse button Getting Started Getting Started This chapter describes how to configure a session and describes various display features WBT Session Configuration Using The Connection Wizard This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the following sections 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box dialog box will be displayed TE Client Connection Wizard Connection Information Connection Name l Emulation VT 400 7 Bit S VT Terminal ID vt420 id Intemational Settings I Cursor Moves Right to Left Operating Language English v Ba N Cancel 3 Specify the language to be used in all menus and dialog boxes by making a selection in the Operating Language list at the bottom of the dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Connection Information Getting Started 4 Enter a name which will identify this sess
14. AIXTerm Emulation Host command summary C 15 Specification D 2 Answerback String 6 19 Automate Login Process 2 21 Aux Port Settings Connection Wizard 2 26 Baud Rate Selection 2 19 6 47 Block Mode Cursor positioning 4 2 Settings 6 59 BQ 3107 Emulation Specification D 2 BufferRows 6 51 Button Tools Adding buttons 5 3 Assigning functions 5 4 Predefinedfunctions 5 1 Redefining 5 3 Removing buttons 5 5 C Character Set Selection 6 52 Character Sets B 1 ANSI 1250 B 11 ANSI 437 B 8 ANSI 850 B 9 ANSI 858 B 10 ASCII B 2 Controlcharacters B 1 DEC Additional B 4 Line Drawing B 5 National characters B 3 DG 410 412 emulation B 12 IBM 3270 emulation B 23 IBM 5250 emulation B 23 ISO Latin 1 Additional B 6 ISO Latin 2 Additional B 7 Multinational B 4 Wyseemulations B 14 Characters In Setup Entries 6 4 Codes In Setup Entries 6 4 Colour Attributes 6 63 Colour Selection Line styles 6 63 Textattributes 6 63 Command Line Options Action on host connection close 15 5 Connection template touse 15 7 Disable bell 15 7 Disable close window menu item 15 11 Disable colour palette 15 16 Disable Command bar 15 12 Disable Edit menu 15 14 Disable Exit box 15 6 Disable Filemenu 15 14 Disable maximize button 15 11 Index 1 Index Disable menu bar 15 13 Disable menu bar amp pop up menus 15 13 Disable Menu bar amp toolbar 15 12 Disable Menu bar pop ups amp toolbar 15 13 Disable min maximize amp cl
15. Clear page to write protected spaces ESC Clear unprotected page to spaces ESC or ESC Clear unprotected page to nulls ESC Clear unprotected page to display attribute ESC attr Clear unprotected page to spaces from cursor ESC Y Clear unprotected page to nulls from cursor ESC y Clear unprotected line to spaces from cursor ESC T Clear unprotected line to nulls from cursor ESCt Fill page with Hs ESCF C 50 Host Command Summary SENDING DATA Send line through cursor ESC 6 Send unprotected line through cursor ESC 4 Send page through cursor ESC7 Send unprotected page through cursor ESC 5 Mark block beginning ESC CTRL B Mark block end ESC CTRL C Send entire block ESCs Send unprotected characters in block ESCS Report terminal status ESC Report attribute under cursor ESC D PRINT FUNCTIONS Print formatted page through cursor ESC P Print formatted unprotected page through cursor ESCP Print unformatted page through cursor ESC p or ESCL Auxiliary print mode off ESCA Auxiliary print mode on ESC Transparent print mode off ESCa Transparent print mode on ESC Bidirectional mode off CTRLT Bidirectional mode on CTRLR Pass next incoming character to printer enhanced CTRL P schar Set print terminator Define delimiters CHARACTER SETS ESC P t1 t2 ESC x d1 d2 Select PC character set Set national mode Set multinational mode 325 COLOUR PALETTE MODE ESC SPACE m charset ESC SPACE U ESC SPACE T
16. It enables you to redefine the button tools displayed in the toolbar For a complete description of the default toolbar refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar A button tool is defined in two stages The first stage is to specify the button bitmap for display in the toolbar and the second stage is to assign a function to it Adding Buttons Clicking the arrow button in the Current Tool box will display a list box showing all the button bitmaps in the order displayed in the toolbar together with their functions The Current Tool will be highlighted in this list When you add a new button to the toolbar it is positioned to the left of the button currently selected in this list Select the current tool then close the list box by clicking the arrow button again To add a new button select a button bitmap from the Buttons list box then click the Insert at Current button Note that the function of this new button will be the same as that of the previously selected button tool until you redefine it You can insert a space before the current button tool as it is displayed in the toolbar by selecting Space in the Commands list box then clicking the Insert at Current button You are not restricted to the set of predefined button bitmaps displayed in the Buttons list box You can add your own customised buttons to the bottom of the list by clicking the Add Custom button This will display the Load Custom Bitmap dialog box which enables you to se
17. Paste This will cause data that has been copied to the clipboard to be pasted at the current cursor position The same block of data may be pasted repeatedly as the clipboard stores it until the Copy command is used again Select All This will cause the window contents not the entire buffer to be selected Clear Buffer This will erase the contents of the window and the scroll buffer Setup Menus Settings Menu Language Settings Language b Emulation Serial Auxpott Terminal Local Editing Block Transmission Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action Button Tools This enables you to select the language that will be used in all menus and dialog boxes The following dialog boxes can be displayed from this menu Note that the dialog boxes used to configure specific emulations can only be displayed when the relevant emulation is running Emulation Settings HP 700 92 96 Settings IBM 3151 Settings Wyse Settings TA 6530 Settings IBM 3270 Settings IBM 5250 Settings Serial Settings Auxport Settings Terminal Settings Local Editing for specifying the terminal emulation for configuring the HP 700 92 96 emulation for configuring the IBM 3151 emulation for configuring the Wyse 50 50 60 TVI 910 920 925 ADDS A2 and HZ 1500 emulations for configuring the Tandem 6530 emulation for configuring the IBM 3270 emulat
18. Select colour map values ESC SPACE fc325 bc map Select a predefined colour palette ESC SPACE pal325 Map blank attribute ESC SPACE Map reverse attribute ESC SPACE amp Select border colour ESC SPACE co1325 Disable intensity attribute ESC SPACE Enable intensity attribute ESC SPACE 370 350 COLOUR MAP MODE Select foreground colour palette ESC SPACE a pal370 Select background colour ESC SPACE c col370 Redefine character attribute association 370 350 COLOUR DIRECT MODE ESC SPACE g a fc be assoc Assign foreground colour Assign background colour Assign display attribute to unprotected characters ESC SPACE d fc370 ESC SPACE e bc370 ESC SPACE f assattr C 51 Host Command Summary Assign foreground background colours Assign fore background colours to write protected chars Assign foreground colours to write protected chars Assign background colours to write protected chars Assign display attribute to write protected characters 370 350 COLOUR MISCELLANEOUS ESC SPACE h CGAcol ESC SPACE i CGAcol ESC SPACE j fc370 ESC SPACE k fc370 ESC SPACE 1 assattr Select border colour Assign replacement character colours amp attributes ESC SPACE b c370 ESC SPACE y fc370 be attr C 52 Host Command Summary Additional Commands DISPLAY COLOUR DEC VT modes Foreground colour Background colour where is one of the following numbers CSI F CSI G
19. CAPS LOCK off enhanced Margin bell off Margin bell on Select standard ASCII key code mode Select PC scan code mode Key repeat off enhanced Key repeat on enhanced Application key mode off Application key mode on Read keyboard status Default unit PROGRAMMING KEYS ESCe ESCn ESC o ESCeH ESCelI ESCe ESC e ESC v2 ESC v3 ESC ESCm Program function key definition ESC z key seq DEL Clear function key definition ESC z key DEL Program key direction amp definition ESC i pl p2 seq CTRL Y Read key direction amp definition ESC Z key Clear key direction amp definition ESC z dir key DEL Clear all programmable keys ESC c U DISPLAY Screen display off ESCO Screen display on ESC N Reverse screen light background ESC b Restore normal screen dark background ESC d Set cursor display features ESC cursor Display 25 data lines ESC Display 43 data lines ESC _ Display next page ESC K Display previous page ESC J Load user line ESC f Display user line ESC g User line display off ESC e or ESCh Clear unshifted label line ESC z CR Program amp display function key label ESC z field label CR Clear function key label ESC z field CR Assign display attribute to a message field ESC mf attr Clear unprotected page to display attribute ESC attr Assign line attribute ESC G attr PROTECTING DATA Write protect mode off ESC Write protect mode on ESC Clear cursor column to write pr
20. KIM O C Olele wo A Emi H Olio gieipioiwaul aieloik l alo ale _ a ba L E FSE I Sl 245 OCTAL DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL a E a KEY This table forms the second half of the ANSI 437 character set the first half being the ASCII character set The ANSI 437 character set is used when the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to 437 B 8 Character Sets ANSI 850 CHARACTER SET O S0n Led 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 aa N k wo A S xX Q m al aq Ol lt amp k Wu 245 OCTAL DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL A m lt a This table forms the second half of the ANSI 850 character set the first half being the ASCII character set The ANSI 850 character set is used when the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to 850 B 9 Character Sets ANSI 858 CHARACTER SET 0 1 2 a 3 a 4 a e 5 a 6 e A 7 j I 8 F 9 i JL e l x f KEY e Decimal A5 HEXADECIMAL
21. Terminal Emulation User s Guide Trademarks ADDS Viewpoint A2 is a trademark of Applied Digital Data Systems Inc AIX is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation DEC VT52 VT100 VT131 VT220 VT300 VT320 VT340 VT400 and VT420 are registered trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation Hazeltine is a trademark of Esprit Systems Inc IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation TeleVideo is a registered trademark and Tele Video 910 910 and 925 are trademarks of Tele Video Systems Inc WYSE is a registered trademark and WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 are trademarks of Wyse Technology Inc All other product names are trademarks of their respective manufacturers Copyright 2003 by Pericom Software PLC All rights reserved Before reproduction of this material in part or in whole obtain written consent from Pericom Software PLC Pericom Software PLC The Stables Cosgrove Milton Keynes MK19 7JJ UK Tel 44 0 1908 267111 Fax 44 0 1908 267112 Contents Contents Introduction ee K KEEN RER EE REENEN eessen 177 About This User s Guide cccccccccccsscccessecessecesceeeseeeesaeceeceneaeeceaees 1 1 Terms Ke E 1 2 Getting Started ssescccscsssescocsesesesssesesesesssrseseseae r WBT Session Configuration o ccccccccccccccccscsceccccssscecessecessseseeessaaees 2 1 Us
22. all CSI J GENERAL Bell BEL Device status report CSI6n PRINTING Media copy CSIi C 21 Host Command Summary HP 700 92 96 Emulation CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters ESC amp d Assign invisible amp attribute s to following chars ESC amp ds Dim H Dim Flash amp Underline M Flashing A Dim Under amp Inverse N Inverse video B Dim Flash Und amp Inv O Invisible S Flash amp Inverse C Underline D Flash amp Underline E Dim amp Flash I Flash Inverse amp Under G Dim amp Inverse J Inverse amp Underline F Dim amp Underline L Attributes off Dim Flash amp Inverse K CHARACTER SETS Select ROMAN 8 normal character set SI Select Line Drawing character set SO CURSOR Clear all tab stops ESC 3 Clear tab stop at current cursor position ESC 2 Cursor relative addressing column ESC amp C Cursor relative addressing column line ESC amp a cc I1R Cursor relative addressing line ESC amp a R Cursor relative addressing line column ESC amp a lr c C Cursor sensing absolute ESC a Cursor sensing relative ESC End of line wrap inhibited ESC amp s1C End of line wrap enabled ESC amp sOC Memory absolute addressing column ESC amp a C Memory absolute addressing column line ESC amp a cc IR Memory absolute addressing line ESC amp a R Memory absolute addressing line column ESC amp a lr cC Move cursor hom
23. c ccccccscccesceesssceesseceseceeaeeetsees 6 5 Selecting A Connection Template 6 6 Menu Description siirsi iir Arinae EAER EEA T 6 7 Contents 2 Contents Fil Mente e eigene edd Eed 6 7 Edit Menthe erte fesse deit eerren ege Seet gei dE 6 14 Settings Mennin te eh aes We ates 6 15 Em lation Sen gs x dear EE 6 17 HP 700 92 96 Settings ceecscsseesecsecseeseeseceeecssecseeeceecaeeeseeeaenees 6 20 IBM 315 1S tings oie reso eteran teks eene TT AN E NE e KEERT 6 26 Wyse EE 6 30 TAGS EAR EE 6 35 IBM 3270 Settings ENEE EE EE 6 37 Notice Board Setup 2 Ad 000 di geedh eege deed Eeer 6 41 IBM 5250 Settings EE 6 43 Seral Setn erter EEGENEN 6 47 AUXPOLt erun edel deeg 6 49 Terminal Setting E 6 50 Tab EE 6 56 Local Editino ungeet bid Sieg deed See Eege 6 57 Block Transmission nsciis ienee iire i ine seei 6 59 ERD nesenie a e e e ea a E r A EE 6 63 Define Keyboard Macros ssesssesseesesseersererrereseersserresrerrsresersreresee 6 68 Defining A Key Or Key Combination sses 6 69 Specifying Characters eeseeeeseseeerseeesrsrssesreerrrrssrrreserersrerrsee 6 70 Ke UttONS EE 6 71 Programming A Soft Button 6 71 Specifying Characters eressero ar EE EE 6 72 Mouse Button Actions ceceesceeseeesseceececesecesaeceeecaeceaeecseeeneeeeee 6 74 Button TOOR sanye e a a eR 6 76 DEC VT Emulation sccccccsssssrsssssssersesesesersene Z T Session CONFIQUIALION spionen irasai a E ER ERN N 7 1 WBT Mod ne n n e
24. Break Settings The setting of these options determine whether or not a timing mark TM and or carriage return CR is sent with a Telnet break packet A timing mark is sent by de fault Send Location This enables you to enter the location of this terminal which may be used by the host to provide a list of users currently logged in giving their name and location 2 11 Getting Started TN3270 Options 3270 Options gt 3270 LU Device Name TN3270E Options v Bi LUL Printer Connect M Bind Ku M Responses IV LUZ Printer M SysReq Gen This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 3270 Options button in the TCP IP Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN3270 is not suppressed Connect This specifies the name of the device which the server will be requested to assign to the Telnet session it may be used when requesting either a terminal or a printer session You can return the local host name by entering s after the device name To return the user name enter u after the device name You can specify how many characters of the name is returned in each case For example 3s will return the first three characters of the local host name and 3s will return the last three characters To automatically assign a new device name for each successive connection either enter dN after the name where N is a decimal value or xN where N is a hexadecimal value Each time the host requests the device name a
25. ESC 421 ESC 42h C 6 Host Command Summary DISPLAY Display host writable status line Display indicator status line Display no status line Send data to main display Send data to status line Display time on status line h hour 24 m minutes Display controls on Display controls off Rectangular fill c fill character sr start row sc start column er end row ec end column EDITING ESC 2 ESC 1 ESC 0 ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC h m p ESC 3h ESC 31 ESC c sr sc er ec z Selective erase line 0 from to 2 all ESC K Selective erase screen 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC J GENERAL OPERATION Select C1 7 bit control mode ESC SPF Select C1 8 bit control mode ESC SPG KEYBOARD Set national keyboard ESC 2 space eS 1 American 14 French 2 British 15 Spanish 3 Belgian 16 Portuguese 4 Canadian 19 Hebrew 5 Danish 22 Greek 6 Finnish 29 Turkish 7 German 31 Hungarian 8 Dutch 33 Slovak 9 Italian 34 Czech 10 Swiss French 35 Polish 11 Swiss German 36 Romanian 12 Swedish 38 Serbian 13 Norwegian 39 Russian Select application keypad mode ESC 66h Select numeric keypad mode ESC 661 Set DEC keyboard mode ESC 99h Reset DEC keyboard mode ESC 991 PF KEYS Clear all PF keys ESC P0 11ESC Lock PF keys ESC P1 01ESC Program a PF key ESC P ESC C 7 Host Command Summary PRINTING Enable bidirectional printi
26. Red foreground 31 Cyan background 46 Green foreground 32 White background 47 Yellow foreground 33 Normal background 49 C 2 Host Command Summary Deselect underline character mode ESC lt 1h Double width amp height top half characters ESC 3 Double width amp height bottom half characters ESC 4 Double width single height characters ESC 6 Select underline character mode ESC lt 1 Single width amp height normal characters ESC 5 CHARACTER SET SELECTION Assign GO label to character set ESC Assign G1 label to character set ESC ASCII N American B Italian Y British A Danish Norwegian or E or 6 Dutch 4 Portuguese 6 Finnish 23 or C Spanish Z French R Swedish 7 or H French Canadian Yor Q Swiss German K Line Drawing 0 Assign GO labelled set to 7 bit codes SI Assign G1 labelled set to 7 bit codes SO CURSOR Clear tab stops 0 cursor position 2 or 3 all ESC g Deselect auto carriage return ESC 201 Disable cursor ESC 501 Disable cursor autowrap ESC 71 Enable cursor ESC 50h Enable cursor autowrap ESC 7h Index cursor move down one line ESCD Insert FF character amp advance cursor FF Line feed LF Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor down one line VT Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor one column left BS Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor to beginning of next line ESCE Move cursor to left margin of current line CR Move cursor to line 1 col
27. Sequences 2 00 0 ceeeececessceeeeeeceseeeeeeneeeaeenes 3 3 Compose Character Sequences osses 3 4 Mouse FUNCTIONS ice sicssscnscsasaseuceniitacsecttencstedediens 4 1 Titrod ction desio eege ees Bai atleast 4 1 Redefining Mouse Functions cccccsccesccesscessecsseenseesecesecesneeneenaes 4 1 Selecting amp Copying Text 4 2 Moving The Cursor In Block Mode 4 2 Send KEV WOT E 4 3 Show amp Action Hotspots cccccccccescccessecesseceeeeceseeeseeceeseneaeceeneenses 4 3 Emulating Middle Mouse Button ccccccccccccccssccecessecesessseeeessseeeeees 4 3 The TOOIDAR hissivsiisisins sssuetaves scavebdslnriubeaaas dev sisdevens 5 1 Using The TOOlDAE si svretssceais veri cnethessaas ANE EERE AE 5 1 The Predefined Button Tools 5 1 Redefining The Tocolber 5 3 Adding Button Bitmaps sseesesseeessseesssrssesresrerrsrenresesresesresreerrrrerees 5 3 Assigning Functions To Buttons 5 4 Removing Button Tools sesessesesesssseeesseeesrreeresesresresrrresrerresreresreresee 5 5 Saving The Button Tools oeseereseseeesrereseeeesererserersrererereerererereseee 5 5 Setup E siccecececccesdneetectestanceterennis tte esseeessstie 6 1 Displaying amp Closing Menus cccccccccccccssccecesseceseesececeesseecnsseeeeeaes 6 1 Using The MENUS sron r anra See Go ates Sete eG 6 2 Eliette BOXES eege ee EES Se Ee EE 6 3 Default Setting So EA Een Eed ded hath NEEN 6 4 Specifying Characters In Setup Ener 6 4 Creating A Connection Template
28. Setup Menus SPOW B Factory default Unselected The setting of the SPace OverWrite option determines whether or not keyboard entered spaces overwrite existing characters When unselected keyboard entered spaces will overwrite existing characters Selecting this option will cause the SPOW latch to be enabled The latch can then be activated by a carriage return When activated keyboard entered spaces will cause the cursor to move forward without deleting characters that already exist The latch can be deactivated by a tab line feed or home up command This will cause spaces to overwrite existing characters as normal InhEolWrp C Factory default Unselected The Inhibit End of line Wrap option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the right margin is reached When selected i e inhibited on reaching the right margin the last character position will be overwritten with every new character received until a carriage return or other cursor movement command is issued LineTx D Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether data is sent a line or a page at a time when in Edit mode When this option is selected data will be transmitted a line at a time When unselected data will be transmitted a page at a time Page data will either be from the beginning of display memory or from the current cursor position InhHndShk G InhDC2 H Factory default Unselected The combined
29. The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the HP 700 92 96 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box This emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett Packard 700 92 2392A 2622A 70094 and 70096 terminals Specify the required HP Model setting 70092 default 2392A 2622A 70094 or 70096 This identifies the particular terminal model being emulated in response to a terminal identification request from the host Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details HP 700 92 96 Emulation For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the releva
30. UKB 697 285 Belgian BLI 697 500 Canadian French CAI 697 500 Danish DMB 697 277 Finnish FNB 697 278 German AGB 697 273 Dutch NEB 697 37 Italian ITB 697 280 Swiss French SFI 697 500 Swiss German SGI 697 500 Swedish SWB 697 278 Norwegian NWB 697 277 French FAB 697 297 Spanish SPB 697 284 Portuguese PRB 697 37 Japanese Kanji Katakana JKB 1172 290 300 Korean KOB 1173 833 834 Simplified Chinese RCB 1174 836 837 Traditional Chinese TAB 1175 37 835 Hebrew New Code NCB 941 424 Hebrew Old Code 941 803 Thai THB 1176 838 Greek GNB 925 875 Cyrillic CYB 960 880 Turkish TRB 1152 1026 Russian RUB 1150 1025 Czech CSB 959 870 Slovak SKB 959 870 Polish POB 959 870 Icelandic ICB 697 871 Arabic 697 420 6 46 Setup Menus Serial Settings Serial Settings Baud Rate Data Bits i e Parity _ Stop Bits Cancel None bea 1 w Flow Control r Transmit Rate iv On Line 4 imil W input Unlimited Bee When the terminal is not in WBT mode this dialog box is displayed by selecting Serial in the Settings menu or by clicking the Configure button in the New Connection dialog box when the connection type is set to Serial Note that the port for serial communications is selected via the New Connection dialog box which is displayed from the File menu Baud Rate Factory default 9600 This specifies the transmit and receive baud
31. When unselected only the selected area containing the cursor will be sent to the host Line Transmission On Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether data is sent to the host a single line at a time or a full or partial page at a time when the Enter key is pressed When selected a single line of valid characters will be sent to the host In this mode the Return key has the same function as Enter When unselected a full or partial page will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed The size of the page is determined by the setting of the Send Partial Page and Transmit Protocol options Send Font Information Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether character set selection sequences for all character sets represented in the data block are transmitted to the host or whether spaces are substituted for characters not contained in the current character set When selected the character set selection sequences for all character sets represented in the data block will be sent When unselected characters which are not contained in the currently selected National or Multinational character set will be substituted with spaces Send Record Separators Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether or not a record separator RS code is appended to each field of data when a block is transmitted to the host Record separator codes are used as markers
32. new characters will be inserted at the cursor position without deleting existing characters which will move to the right Item 7 This will display Edit when the terminal emulation is in Edit mode Item 8 This will display the time in 24 hour format when in DEC VT500 mode if the VT525 set time command has been received from the host Item 9 Indicates the status of the printer as follows None signifies that the printer is not turned on or not connected or not installed in Microsoft Windows Not Ready signifies that the printer is not ready to receive data for printing Ready signifies that the printer is ready to receive data for printing Auto signifies that the emulation is in Auto Print mode in which the current cursor line is sent to the printer when a command for the cursor to move to the next line is issued 2 29 Getting Started Controller signifies that the emulation is in Printer Controller mode in which the host has direct control over the printer Print screen commands issued from the keyboard or mouse will be ignored ErrGen indicates that an error has occurred and a message box will be displayed indicating the error Item 10 This indicates the keyboard mode It will be blank when the keyboard is in normal mode and will display DEC when in DEC mode You can toggle between normal and DEC mode by pressing the keys Alt Num Lock together Item11 Indicates the status of the aux port as follows Ready indic
33. 1 in order registered trade mark Latin 1 RO macron A Latin 1 ora three quarters 34 Latin 1 in order division sign Latin 1 multiplication sign Latin 1 X X acute accent ve Latin 1 dieresis umlaut TT or Latin 1 space Y acute Latin 1 Y y acute Latin 1 y capital Icelandic TH thorn Latin 1 in order small Icelandic th thorn Latin 1 in order capital Icelandic D Eth Latin 1 small Icelandic d Eth Latin 1 3 8 Mouse Functions Mouse Functions This chapter describes the special functions assigned to the mouse and how to redefine them Introduction You can assign up to six special functions to the left and right mouse buttons when used in conjunction with modifier keys The following functions are defined by default Left Button Right Button Normal Select Edit Copy Shift Extend Selection Edit Paste Control Action Hotspot Unassigned Control Shift Select Rectangle Unassigned Alt Move Cursor Send Keyword Double Click Select Word Unassigned Redefining Mouse Functions You can redefine the functions assigned to the mouse buttons using the Mouse Button Actions dialog box which is displayed from the Settings menu Right Ni Belect Etc o MEE CE Control Action Hotspot X unassigned Control Shift Show Hotspots x unassigned zl a Cc IM Highlight When Actioned Cancel 4 1 Mouse Functions Thi
34. 16 WY 60 PC Equivalent B 17 WY 60 Standard ANSI B 19 WY 60 Standard ASCII B 18 Host command summary C 42 Keyboard mapping 14 5 Session configuration 14 1 Setup 6 30 Specification D 7 Statusline 14 4 Virtual key names A 7 Wyse PC Term Emulation Host command summary C 48 Index 8
35. 5 To save the definitions click OK to exit then select Save Session As in the File menu make sure the Keyboard Macros box is checked then click OK Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the lt and gt characters in the key definition box You may omit the VK_ and VT_ etc parts of the virtual key name To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with plus sign characters and ending with the gt character For example to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the key definition box lt ALT F4 gt To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For examp
36. 94d DEC VT Emulations Notes 7 8 DG 410 412 Emulation DG 410 412 Emulation This chapter describes the Data General D410 412 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the DG 410 412 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Informatio
37. C or ESC a Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor to specified line integer ESC d Move cursor to line 1 column c ESC l cH Move cursor to line 1 column c ESC 1 cf Move cursor down 1 line amp to column 1 NAK Move cursor to start of line CR Move cursor down 1 line in current column LF Move cursor up lines amp to first column ESC F Move cursor down lines amp to first column ESC E Move cursor one column left BS Move cursor to next tab stop HT Tab cursor backward tabs ESC Z Enable cursor autowrap ESC 7h Disable cursor autowrap ESC 71 C 30 Host Command Summary EDITING Erase from cursor to end of display ESC 0J Erase from start of display to cursor ESC 1J Erase entire display ESC 2 Erase from cursor to end of line ESC 0K Erase from start of line to cursor ESC 1K Erase entire line ESC 2K Erase characters from cursor right ESC X Insert blank characters ESC Insert blank lines ESC L Delete lines from cursor position down ESC M Delete characters ESC P Set tab at cursor position ESCH PRINTING Send page ESC 2i Send line ESC 3i Print page ESC 0i Print all pages ESC 11i Print cursor line ESC 1i Transparent print mode off ESC 4i Transparent print mode on ESC 5i Auxiliary print mode on ESC 5i Auxiliary print mode off ESC 4i C 31 Host Command Summary TA6530 Emulation Conversational amp Block Mode ATTRIB
38. Colour Palette Registry Entry UsePalette off Command Line SP Default Setting on The colour palette used by the emulator can be disabled if it interferes with colours used by other applications running at the same time 15 16 Initialization Commands Flashing Characters Enabled In All Sessions Registry Entry None Command Line FB Default Setting off This enables characters with the flashing attribute to be displayed as such in all session windows in addition to the currently focused window Reflection 4 Colour Support Registry Entry iR4colours on Command Line R4 Default Setting off These commands will cause the colours displayed by the emulator to be compatible with Reflection 4 software 15 17 Initialization Commands Keyboard amp Mouse Convert To MDIS P9 Registry Entry MDCUK Yes Command Line None Default Setting no This command is only applicable to the MDIS P9 emulation It will convert the character to and vice versa on the UK keyboard Disable Editing Functions Registry Entry MouseKdit disabled allows highlighting but no copy paste MouseEdit off all editing functions disabled MouseEdit on all editing functions enabled Command Line MEQ allows highlighting but no copy paste ME1 all editing functions disabled ME2 all editing functions enabled Default Setting All functions enabled In some cases it may be necessary to disable
39. Column Font Page width feg had Save Screen Before Clearing Columns g0 e 7 e MV Vertical Coupling Horizontal Coupling xl Cursor Type r Status Line NumLock Action Block D Unavailable SG T Ignore NumLock Set Tabs Preferred Font LI Preferred Char Set Courier New x DEC MCs z 437 z This dialog box is displayed by selecting Terminal in the Settings menu Note The Tab Stops dialog box displayed by clicking the Set Tabs button is described in the next section Display Rows Factory default 24 This specifies the number of text rows that can be viewed in the workspace at any one time out of the total number stored in memory This can be set to a maximum of 64 Note that the number of rows stored in memory is specified by the Memory Rows option Display Columns Factory default 80 This option enables you to specify a width of 80 or 132 columns for the workspace When set to 132 the setting of the Use 80 Column Font option determines whether all 132 columns are displayed using a narrow font or only 80 columns at a time using the normal 80 column font with the ability to scroll horizontally to view the remaining columns Use 80 Column Font Factory default Unselected This option specifies which font to use when the Display Columns option is set to 132 When unselected a narrow font will be used so that all 132 columns are visible in the window When selected only 80
40. ESC 5n Report terminal emulation mode ESC 0 Report VT terminal identity ESC 0c Report VT terminal identity ESC c Report VT terminal identity ESCZ ANSI VT500 Emulation When running the VT500 7 or 8 bit emulation the following commands will be executed in addition those listed previously for ANSI VT 100 CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters Attributes Invisible 8 Flashing off Bold off 22 Reverse video off Underline off 24 Invisible off Non erase attribute on Non erase attribute off 0 or 2 CHARACTER SET SELECTION ESC m 25 27 28 ESC 1 q ESC q Assign G2 label to character set Assign G3 label to character set DEC Additional ISO Latin 1 Additional Assign G1 labelled set to 8 bit codes Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character Assign G2 labelled set to 8 bit codes Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character Assign G3 labelled set to 8 bit codes Clear redefinable character set Load redefinable character set Preferred Additional set is DEC Preferred Additional set is ISO Latin 1 Select Multinational character set mode Select National character set mode Extra character sets ESC second is parameter ESC 5 A ESC ESC n ESCN ESC ESC o ESCO ESCI ESCP1 1 2 SP ESC ESC P ESC ESC P 0 u 5 ESC ESCP 1 u A ESCH
41. F12 can be redefined from the keyboard or by the host The function keys can store up to 128 characters between them and can include escape sequences and ASCII control characters in addition to character strings Here we describe how to define a function key from the keyboard 1 Display the function key menu by pressing the keys Shift Esc Field A Field B 2 Specify the function key to be defined by entering a two digit number in field A for example 01 for F1 12 for F12 then press Enter Field B will display the current definition of the function key DEP E Mee AID 3 In field B enter the new definition for the function key This can include a character string escape sequence or control characters A control character is entered by typing the keyboard equivalent For example the CR carriage return character is entered by pressing Ctrl M Refer to the Character Sets appendix to find the keyboard equivalents of other control characters The following example shows the definition entry for the F1 key so that it displays New definition then performs a carriage return when pressed DEF E 01 Pericom Software BENENNEN You can erase the character at the current cursor position by pressing the keys Ctrl 2 If you want to restore the default definition press the Clear key while the cursor is in field B 4 Press the Send key to store the key definition The function key menu will be cleared to allow you to enter
42. General D410 keyboard has a SPCL key which enables you to generate characters from the DG International character set You can generate the same characters by using the method described for the DEC emulation Refer to the Compose Character Sequences section in the Keyboard Configuration chapter for details Key Codes The following table lists the decimal value of codes generated when keys that emulate those found on the Data General keyboard are pressed alone or in conjunc tion with the Shift and or Ctrl keys Note that each code shown is the second code generated when the key or key combination is pressed the first always being the code RS Hex 1E Key Shift Ctrl Ctrl Shift Key Key Key F1 113 97 49 33 F2 114 98 50 34 F3 115 99 51 35 F4 116 100 52 36 F5 117 101 33 37 F6 118 102 54 38 F7 119 103 55 39 F8 120 104 56 40 F9 121 105 57 41 F10 122 106 58 42 F11 123 107 59 43 F12 124 108 60 44 F13 125 109 61 45 F14 126 110 62 46 F15 112 96 48 32 C1 92 88 C2 93 89 C3 94 90 C4 95 91 UP 23 DOWN 26 LEFT 25 RIGHT 24 HOME 8 PRINT 17 1 DG 410 412 Emulation Notes 8 6 HP 700 92 96 Emulation HP 700 92 96 Emulation This chapter describes features of the Hewlett Packard 700 92 96 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode
43. Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button All the Wyse associated emulations are configured via the Wyse Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter Note that some settings may not apply to the particular emulation currently running Selecting a setting that is not applicable to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for that emulation when the dialog box is exited Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the Wyse terminal emulation required in the Alpha Emulation list box The WY50 WY50 and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminals respectively The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 14 2 Wyse Emulations terminals The HZ
44. Menus Dialog Boxes Selecting an option which is followed by an ellipsis will cause a dialog box to be displayed The example shown below is displayed by selecting the Block Transmission option in the Settings menu Block Transmission IT Send Unprotected Only IV Send Font Information IT Send Only Selected Areas IV Send Record Separators M Send all Selected Areas IT Send Spaces Compressed IT Line Transmission On J Send Partial Page PF Key Effect None C Breakthrough As TX Prefix As TX Suffix Send Key Effect Transmit Protocol Immediate Deferred C Anel C vr Ia End of Line Characters M End of Block Characters Cancel There are four basic methods for changing settings within the dialog boxes Options preceded by a check box such as Send Unprotected Only in the example above are true or selected when the box contains a tick and false or unselected when the box is empty Click the pointer in the box to toggle the setting on or off or press the spacebar on the keyboard When a group of options preceded by round buttons are enclosed in a box such as the PF Key Effect options in the example above only one of these options is selected or true at any one time The currently selected option is indicated by a button with a dark centre These buttons behave just like radio buttons in that clicking one will cause the previously selected button to be deselected Some options re
45. Modes The Tandem 6530 emulation operates in one of three main modes Conversational Block or ANSI Conversational and Block modes are normally used for applications running on a NonStop host system and ANSI mode for applications running on the LXN host system Conversational Mode In Conversational mode characters are sent to the host as you type them This is useful when applications need to interact with you on a character word or line by line basis Display memory is treated as one long page consisting of 400 lines of which 24 lines may be viewed at any one time Lines above or below those currently displayed may be scrolled into view using cursor or display control keys Once all the display memory has been used new data will force all previous lines of data up one line so that the first line is erased ensuring that the oldest data is erased first The status line will display CONV when you are in Conversational mode Block Mode In Block mode characters are stored in a communications buffer and are not transmitted to the host until the application requests them The characters are then sent as a block This enables you to enter a large amount of data and edit it locally before it is transmitted Block mode has two sub modes Block Nonprotect and Block Protect In Block Nonprotect mode you can enter any type of character at any position on the screen except on the 25th line In Block Protect mode the application divides
46. National only characters found in the character set that corresponds to the selected keyboard nationality can be composed When Multinational is selected the emulator is in Multinational mode and charac ters from all national keyboard layouts may be composed The tables of characters that are used in Multinational mode depend on the setting of the Preferred Char Set option When this is set to DEC MCS the ASCII 7 bit and DEC Additional 8 bit character sets are used When this option is set to ISO Latin 1 the ASCII 7 bit and ISO Latin 1 Additional 8 bit character sets are used The Character Sets appendix shows all the tables of characters that may be selected If a character is a diacritical symbol e g or 1 and this symbol does not appear on the keyboard an equivalent character can be used in some cases The diacritical symbols and the possible substitutes are shown below There are no equivalents for the circumflex accent and tilde mark Diacritical Mark Equivalent Character Acute accent Apostrophe Umlaut Double quote Grave accent Single quote Ring mark Asterisk or degree sign To compose a character first find the character you wish to compose in the left hand column of the following tables The two characters shown in the right hand column are the keys that are used to create it Several alternatives may be given for generating the same character A compose sequence is initiated by pressing the keys Alt C
47. Read with address all Block mode ESC Read with address all extended Block mode ESC K Read with all attributes Block mode ESCQ Reinitialize Block mode ESC q Set buffer address Block mode DC Set buffer address extended ESC C Set emulation configuration ESC v Soft reset ESC p Text start Block mode STX Text end Block mode ETX Sound bell BEL C 33 Host Command Summary KEYBOARD Define Return key Conversational mode ESC u Lock keyboard ESC c Unlock keyboard ESC b Simulate function key ESC d REPORTS Report cursor address ESC a Report emulation status ESC Report firmware revision level ESC _ ANSI Mode CHARACTER SETS Select GO character set ESC Select G1 character set ESC Shift out to GO character set SI Shift out to G1 character set SO CURSOR Autowrap enabled ESC 7h Autowrap disabled ESC 71 Clear tab stops 0 cursor position 2 or 3 all ESC g Cursor enabled ESC 25h Cursor disabled ESC 251 Horizontal tab HT LF is LFCR new line mode ESC 20h LF is LF only ESC 201 Move cursor left one column BS Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor down one line LF or VT or FF Move cursor down one line ESCD or IND Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor up one line ESCM or RI Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor to beginning of line CR Move cursor to column one of next line NEL Move cursor to col
48. TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next IBM 5250 Emulation 9 The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings 10 When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager 11 In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box 2 Set the Alpha Emulation option to IBM5250 then click OK The terminal will now be in Network Virtual Terminal mode 3 Display the Settings menu and select IBM 5250 to display the IBM 5250 Settings dialo
49. a line below the last display able line of data nothing will be sent to the printer Copy Page F7 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F7 will cause a copy of all lines from and including the cursor line to the last line displayed on the screen to be sent to the printer The cursor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the current line has been printed You can cancel printing at the end of the current line by pressing Return Note If the cursor is positioned on a line below the last display able line of data nothing will be sent to the printer HP 700 92 96 Emulation Copy Line F8 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F8 will cause a copy of the line containing the cursor to be sent to the printer The cursor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the line has been printed Note If the cursor is positioned on a line below the last display able line of data nothing will be sent to the printer If the cursor is positioned on an empty line between two blocks of data the printer will perform a carriage return and line feed Device Modes oe ee a eS Se Device Control F1 Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Control function labels to be displayed enabling you to select the device s to which data is sent and also to copy portions of d
50. amp SWISS FRENCH GERMAN CHARACTER SET gt gt gt gt A A Dovoz zir x c N lt x Sle claov O OO NI OO oO AJOIN za Di DI CIC C C Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 31 Character Sets IBM EBCDIC CODEPAGES SUPPLIED Codepage 37 SBCS USA Canada Netherlands Portugal Brazil 273 SBCS Austria Germany 274 SBCS Belgium old 277 SBCS Denmark Norway 278 SBCS Finland Sweden 280 SBCS Italy 284 SBCS Spain Latin America Spanish 285 SBCS UK 290 SBCS Japanese Katakana 297 SBCS France 300 DBCS Japanese Kanji 420 SBCS Arabic 424 SBCS Hebrew New Code 500 SBCS Latin 1 Belgium Canada Switzerland 803 SBCS Hebrew Old Code 833 SBCS Korean 834 DBCS Korean 835 DBCS Traditional Chinese 836 SBCS Simplified Chinese 837 DBCS Simplified Chinese 838 SBCS Thai 870 SBCS Latin 2 Czech Slovak Polish 871 SBCS Icelandic 875 SBCS Greek 880 SBCS Cyrillic 905 SBCS Latin 3 Turkish old 1025 SBCS Russian Cyrillic 1026 SBCS Latin 5 Turkish 1027 SBCS Japanese Latin extended 1140 SBCS EURO USA Canada Netherlands Portugal Brazil 1141 SBCS EURO Aust
51. associated with the currently selected screen element Note that the Column Sep CS option is only applicable to the IBM 5250 emulation and the Hidden option is only applicable to the Wyse 60 emulation Selecting the Use Italic with Intensity option will italicize any characters that have the intensity bold attribute Selecting Use Bold Font will cause all characters to be displayed using a bold font The setting of the Use Colours option in the Preferences box determines whether or not a specific colour is assigned to the text attribute When the Use Colours option is selected the colour of the screen element can be changed by tapping on the required 6 63 Setup Menus colour block in the palette of Foreground and or Background colours The two palettes enable you to specify a different colour for text foreground and text cell background Screen Element This list box enables you to select the screen element for definition The Ansi Palette option allows you to specify which set of eight Foreground and Background colour indices are used when ANSI colour escape sequences are received Either the upper or lower eight colours in the Foreground and Background palettes can be selected The current eight colours are enclosed within a box To change the current set of eight just tap on any colour in the set required The list box also enables you to select various display options depending on the current terminal emulation mo
52. attribute Line attribute mode on Page attribute mode on Wyse 60 character attribute mode on Wyse 60 character attribute mode off CHARACTER SETS WY 60 only ESC OG attribute ESC G line attribute ESC attribute ESCe3 ESCe2 ESCe1 ESCe0 Define amp load soft character ESC c A b p c CTRL Y b bank 0 3 p position in character set 2 byte hex zez character bit pattern 32 byte character string Automatic font loading enabled Automatic font loading disabled Load font bank with predefined character set Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 1 2 Bank 2 3 Bank 3 ESCeO ESCeN ESC c bank set Set Native mode Standard ANSI G Multinational A 44 line Native mode Standard ASCII B 44 line Multinational a Graphics 1 C 44 line PC Equivalent b PC Equivalent D 44 line Standard ASCII c Graphics 2 E 44 line Standard ANSI d Graphics 3 F Clear font bank 0 3 ESCc Specify font bank for primary character set 0 3 ESCcB Specify font bank for secondary character set 0 3 ESCcC Select primary character set for display ESCcD Select secondary character set for display ESC cE CLEARING DATA Clear cursor column ESC V Clear entire rectangle in 80 column page Clear entire rectangle in 132 column page Clear page to nulls Clear page to spaces Clear page to write protected spaces Clear unprotected column to nulls Clear unprotected column to specified character Clear unprotected line to nul
53. before a block of data is transmitted When set to As TX Suffix the function of unshifted PF keys will be sent to the host after a block of data is transmitted Send Key Effect Factory default Immediate The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Enter key when sending data to the host When Immediate is selected data will be sent to the host immediately without waiting for permission to transmit When Deferred is selected a code will be sent to the host notifying it that data is ready for transmission The keyboard will be locked until the host requests that the data is transmitted Transmit Protocol Factory default ANSI The setting of this option determines whether a partial page of data is transmitted in ANSI or VT131 format when the Send Partial Page option is selected When ANSI is selected Local Editing mode will function according to ANSI American National Standards Institute rules When VT131 is selected Local Editing mode will function in the same way as a VT131 terminal Select this option when running software written for the VT131 6 61 Setup Menus End of Line Characters Factory default M i e CR This text box is used to specify the characters that are to indicate the end of a line ina data block To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value
54. box or by pressing the keys Alt F2 Refer to the Notice Board Facility section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for information on how to use the Notice Board Notice Board Enabled Factory default Unselected When this option is selected pressing the Zoom key will toggle the display between full screen i e the screen currently containing the cursor and split screen host screen and Notice Board mode The following Zoom Settings options determine which is displayed above the other Note that the host screen contains the same number of rows and columns whether displayed full screen or in split screen Zoom Seitings Factory default Below Host These toggle settings determine whether the Notice Board is displayed above or below the host screen When viewing the display pointers at each end of the dividing line between the two screens indicate which is the host screen Copy to F Key Enabled Factory default Unselected This enables the facility for copying screen data to a function key Refer to the Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details 6 41 Setup Menus Copy Only User Fields to F Key Factory default Selected This will enable only data contained in user entry fields in the selected area to be copied to a function key Refer to the Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section in the JBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details Copy All Data to F Key Factory default
55. but they cannot be saved as colours are mapped differently in this mode The emulation also includes typeahead capability so that you can continue to enter data without waiting for a prompt from the host Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 4 Select the IBM 3270 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box 10 1 IBM 3270 Emulation 10 Select the IBM 3270 Model which determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes are supported One of four display sizes can be selected 3278 9 2 24 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 3 32 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 4 43 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 5 27 rows by 132 columns Settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended at tributes 3270 field attributes extended highlighting blink flash and underscore but not in combination foreground colour and query reply inbound structured fi
56. by selecting Serial in the Type list box then clicking the Configure button Configuration of COM1 Baud Rate Data Bits 9600 8 X Parity r Stop Bits None D fi D Cancel m Elow Control r Transmit Limit Input pi Unlimited w woos Baud Rate Factory default 9600 This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates for the port selected for host com munications Parity Factory default None This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character If the number of Data Bits is 8 set this option to None Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0 Flow Control Factory default Input This option specifies the type of flow control used by the line port to communicate readiness to transmit or receive data from the host None No flow control Input XON XOFF on received data Output XON XOFF on transmitted data 2 19 Getting Started In Out XON XOFF on transmitted amp received data Hardware DTR CTS hardware flow control Data Bits Factory default 8 This option specifies the number of
57. columns will be visible using the normal font with the remaining columns stored off screen You can scroll horizontally to view the hidden columns by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor keys 6 50 Setup Menus Memory Rows Factory default 144 This option determines the number of text rows that are stored in memory This can be set from 0 to 528 rows by default The Display Rows option specifies the number of memory rows that can be viewed in the workspace at any one time Memory Page Size Factory default 24 When the emulator is in VT420 mode the display memory of 144 lines can be divided into several pages up to a maximum of six pages of 24 lines each The setting of this option determines the number of lines on a page and therefore how many pages are available Note that the page size can be larger than the Display Rows setting in which case you can scroll the page up or down in the window by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Up or Down Cursor keys When the emulator is in any mode other than VT420 the page size is the same as the Display Rows setting Memory Page Width Factory default 80 This option specifies the width of display memory for DEC VT modes in the range 80 to 132 columns When the number of Display Columns is less than the page width specified here you can scroll horizontally to view the hidden columns by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor k
58. counter will be substituted into the device name If the host rejects the device name as in use the counter will be incremented modulus N and the name retried until all possibilities have been tried at which point the emulation will report a device name rejected error For example TEST d4 will give TEST1 on all connections until the host rejects the name as in use in which case TEST2 will be used If this is already in use then TESTS is used or if already in use then TESTO These values are preserved over power off so the first connection of any given power on may not be TEST1 Assume that the start point is random Note There are separate counters for the IBM 3270 and IBM 5250 emulations When you achieve a TN3270E connection the LU device name that you are connected as will be displayed on the status line If the specified device is rejected by the server or host then an error message box will be displayed indicating the reason 2 12 Getting Started Associate This is available when the IBM 3270 Model option is set to 3287 1 a printer It is used to request that the device name of the printer associated with a particular termi nal is assigned to this Telnet session The name of the terminal is specified here This is implemented as described in RFC 1647 TN3270E Options TN3270E in implemented as described in RFC 1647 These options should not be changed unless required by your System Administrator The Bind se
59. cursor one column right Move cursor to left margin of current line Move cursor to next tab stop Move cursor up one line Reverse line feed ESC Y line column FF LF ESCB VT ESCH BS ESC D ESC C CR HT ESCA ESCI C 1 Host Command Summary TEXT ERASURE Erase text to end of line ESCK Erase text to end of screen ESCJ GENERAL Cancel current ESC sequence amp display error CAN Sound audible tone BEL MODE SELECTION Select numeric keypad application mode ESC Select numeric keypad normal mode ESC gt Select VT100 mode ESC lt PRINTING Auto print off ESC _ Auto print on ESC Print controller off ESC X Print controller on ESC W REPORTS Request mode identification report ESCZ Send terminal emulation mode report ESC 0 ANSI VT100 Emulation CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters ESC m Default attributes 0 Blue foreground 34 White background 50 Bold on 1 Magenta foreground 35 Red background 51 Dim White 2 Cyan foreground 36 Red background 52 Underline on 4 White foreground 37 Yellow background 53 Flashing on 5 Normal foreground 39 Blue background 54 Inverse video on 7 White background 40 Magenta background 55 Half intensity off 22 Red background 41 Cyan background 56 Underline off 24 Red background 42 White background 57 Flashing off 25 Yellow background 43 Normal background 59 Inverse video off 27 Blue background 44 Black foreground 30 Magenta background 45
60. data bits sent for each transmitted character Stop Bits Factory default 1 This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character Transmit Rate Factory default Unlimited The setting of this option determines the maximum effective baud rate that the emulatortransmits terminal reports and data sent as a result of pasting data to the host Local Echo Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are dis played on the screen as well as sent to the host When unselected characters are not displayed when they are transmitted unless the host echoes them back 2 20 Getting Started Automate Login Process The Automate Login Process dialog box enables you to automate part or all of the host login procedure TE Client Connection Wizard Automate Login Process r Script Acton Send Wait Fo Text C Keyboard Lock m al C Keyboard Unlock zl Respond with ji Return z VK_SHIFT v i puas a gt lt Back Cancel The settings in this dialog box enable you to specify what is sent to the host in response to prompts displayed on the screen 1 If an initiation string is required by the host when you first make a connection select the Set Initiation String option enter the required characters in the Initiate with box the Respond With box in the illustration above then click the Add button The initiation string wi
61. dialog box is exited Note The Tab Stops dialog box displayed by clicking the Set Tabs button is described later in this chapter after the Terminal Settings description Lines Factory default 24 This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and specifies the number of data lines displayed on the screen below the status line Note that the other emulations only support 24 lines and a label line 24 24 data lines and a label line at the bottom 25 25 data lines but no label line 42 42 data lines and a label line at the bottom 43 43 data lines but no label line 6 30 Setup Menus Page Size Factory default 1 x Lines This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and specifies the size of a page in display memory in multiples of the Lines setting Note that the other emulations only support 1 x Lines The 1 Rest setting will divide the display memory into two pages the first containing the number of lines specified by the Lines option the second containing all the remaining lines Note that changing the page format will cause the entire display memory to be cleared the cursor will move to the home position and the scroll margin will be reset Status Line Factory default Standard This option applies to all emulations and enables you to specify the type of status line displayed at the top of the screen or remove it from the display Both the Standard and Extended status lines display messages
62. emulation currently running Selecting a setting that is not applicable to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for that emulation when the dialog box is exited 14 3 Wyse Emulations Display Format Below the command bar described in chapter 2 the display is divided into three areas by default the status line the data area and the label line The status line which is used to display information relating to the emulation and messages from the application The following section describes the status messages that can be displayed by the emulation The data area is where data entered from the keyboard or the application is displayed The data area is set to 24 lines by 80 columns by default The label line is displayed at the bottom of the screen when the data area is set to 24 or 42 lines This is can be used to display messages or function key labels defined by the host Status Line Messages The status line is divided into two sections The left section displays messages relating to the emulation and the right section is used to display messages from the host The type of status line displayed is determined by the setting of the Status Line option in the Wyse Settings dialog box The Extended status line provides similar information to the Standard status line but with additional fields for displaying information on local editing mode The emulation status messages are displayed in o
63. he nae ee 7 1 Non WBT MOG siscc ciecsoctevecseveeearreutieceneetuhivvrneendie died doostien ETER 7 2 RTE 7 4 Horizontal SCrOUING ernennen a EATE E REES 7 5 Keyboard Manning 7 5 DG 410 412 Emulation ccsesecsscessseressesssereeeee 8 1 Session Configuration cccccccccesecesseceeneeeaceceeeeeseecesaeceaaeceeaeeceaeeesas 8 1 WB Mode eatre ege 8 1 Non WBT Mode n ia a ara r er E a a E Eed 8 2 Keyboard Manning 8 3 Contents 3 Contents Key Functionsiiie38 ten E RE eh 8 3 LEE 8 5 HP 700 92 96 Emulation ssseeeceeeeneseeesssnererens 9 1 Session Configuration 0 ceccccescceeesecesseceeceeeneeceseeesaeceeaaeceaeecneeeenaees 9 1 WBT Modes edd 9 1 Non W BT Mode x ssccesteccnsesceeavecsetuh ere e E E ETA 9 2 Display Configuration ccccccccccsccccssecesseceececeseeeeseesceceeeeeeaeeeeseeesas 9 3 Keyboard Mapping anere iiei E RE Eih 9 3 Buttons amp Function Keys ccccccsscccsscceessecenseceseeeesseeeseceeaeeeeeceseeees 9 5 Mode S lections rie a a a i EE EE A E 9 5 Configuration Selection ssseseeeesseeessseeesrseerrsessrrtrsrrresrerrsserreseerenre 9 8 DEVice Controlere eera EE EAE AA 9 8 Deyice Modes mair an aa aa Eaa eege EEN ARC 9 10 Margins Tabs E Start Column sssssssseseeeesseresrsreessreeresreresresrerrsreses 9 11 Key RVOSTAMMING iarere rea eaa a a E Eoia 9 13 Character Display Attributes coruna noniin 9 16 IBM 3270 Emulation ccccccccccccsseeeeresreesssneeeesenens 10 1 TNIV OGMUCTION cose Secures E
64. host On Line Factory default Selected When this option is selected normal two way communication between the emulator and the host is enabled When unselected the emulator is in Local mode and data will not be sent to or received from the host Data typed on the keyboard will be displayed on the screen or actioned if a control command is typed Local Echo Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host When unselected characters are not displayed when they are transmitted unless the host echoes them back 6 48 Setup Menus Auxport Setup Terminal Emulation Auxport Setup Auxport komi X Configure o This dialog box is displayed by selecting Auxport in the Settings menu It enables you to specify a COM or LPT port for bidirectional output when in any DEC VT mode ANSI BBS Sco Console or IBM 3151 mode Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box in which you can specify settings for the COM port The options in it are described in the Serial Settings section earlier in this chapter Auxport Serial Settings m Baud Rate Data Bits Joe of Parity Stop Bits Cancel none S 1 hi Flow Control input bd 6 49 Setup Menus Terminal Settings Terminal Settings m Display r Memory r Preferences G IE Rows 1 44 Page Size 24 IF Use 80
65. in the current line if it is the last line of data in display memory This pointer will remain in display memory until the line is deleted If the line has no start of text pointer data transmission will begin at the start column specified by this option The column range is from 1 to 80 inclusive Note The setting of this option may be temporarily redefined using one of the Margin Tab Col function keys See the HP 700 92 96 Emulation chapter for details 6 23 Setup Menus FildSeparator Factory default _ i e US This text box is used to specify the ASCII character used to indicate the end of each protected field except the last that is sent in Edit Mode To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the default ASCII character US can be entered by typing the characters and _ representing the keys Ctrl _ which when pressed together would generate the US code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of US is 31 so this would be entered as _031 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references BlkTerminator Factory default i e RS This text box is used to sp
66. initialize the Winsock stack immediately when the emulator is started enabling dialup over PPP or SLIP to gain a connection to a service provider Action On Host Connection Close Registry Entry ExitOnClose on emulator exits immediately ExitOnClose off emulator does not exit ExitOnClose connect emulator attempts to reconnect Command Line E emulator exits immediately E1 emulator does not exit E2 emulator attempts to reconnect Default Setting Message box displayed When the host closes the connection or the connection fails the emulator normally displays a message box giving you the option to reconnect cancel or exit These commands will disable the message box and cause the emulator to immediately perform the required option Disable New Session Warning Message Box Registry Entry SessionWarning off Command Line OS Default Setting Enabled A warning message is displayed by default when you attempt to open a new session while a session is currently open These commands enable you to disable the message box so that the emulator automatically closes the current session and opens the new session 15 5 Initialization Commands Disable Exit Message Box Registry Entry WarnExit off Command Line J Default Setting Enabled A message box will be displayed if you attempt to exit the emulator while a network session is still active These commands will disable the message box so that the emu
67. is an IBM 5250 screen This screen will be displayed when you have initiated a Telnet session with the host M Indicates that the system has one or more messages waiting for you Indicates that the keyboard is in Insert mode Already existing characters to the right of the cursor will move to make room for new characters that are entered IBM 5250 Emulation Insert mode can be disabled by pressing the Insert key again pressing the Reset key or by performing any action that sends data to the host such as pressing the Enter Clear or PF keys X Indicates when input from the keyboard or mouse will not be accepted by the host When this is because an error has occured as shown in the error line pressing the Reset key will remove the error Alternatively more information can be obtained by pressing the Help key The only other keys available are Attn SysReq and Print Note that the emulation includes typeahead capability so that in most cases you can continue to enter data without waiting for the Do Not Enter message to clear as the data will be stored until the host is ready Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where IBM 5250 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the IBM 5250 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the AS virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box Word Processin
68. key Defines the alternate shifted function key The final character Key definition strings follow and these are terminated by ST definition strings in the following format Key1 UDS UDS Direction Key2 UDS UDS Direction rs Key Is the key selection number of the key to be defined as listed below Fl 11 F5 15 F9 20 F2 12 F6 17 F10 21 F3 13 F7 18 Fll 23 F4 14 F8 19 F12 24 Is a delimiter UDS UDS Direction Is the user defined string consisting of hex pairs in the following ranges 3 0 through 3 9 0 through 9 4 1 through 4 6 A through F 6 1 through 6 6 a through f For example the hex encoding for PRINT would be as follows 5052494E54 This enables you to use any of the 256 character codes in the key string You can enter key definition strings in any order Specifies the transmission direction Oornone Normal Host and or terminal default 1 Local Terminal only 2 Remote Host only C 9 Host Command Summary PROGRAMMING ALPHANUMERIC KEYS Program Alphanumeric Key s DCS y D D ST where the data string D D format is as follows Keyl Hex Code String Function UDS UDS Direction Key2 Key Is the key station number of the key to be programmed as listed below Esc Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 110 F10 121 Page Up 85 112 Fll 122 Page Down 86 113 F12 123 Cursor Left 79 114 Print Screen 124 Cursor Right 89 115 Scroll Lock 125 Cursor Up 83 116 Pause 126 Cursor D
69. m3 m4 op ESC 9 m1 m2 m3 m4 op ESC amp 9 m1 m2 m3 op Disable print key attention Disable reset key attention Enable print key attention Enable reset key attention Keyboard lock Keyboard unlock Load programmable function key Set all default function keys ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC fn fnx ff fp ESC ESC SPt Set default function key ESC t key PRINTING Print line ESCU Print message ESC V Print screen ESC SP W Print viewport ESC W C 28 Host Command Summary SCO Console Emulation CONTROLLING TERMINAL PROCESSING Sound audible tone BEL Select iBCSe2 compliance ESC 2L Deselect iBCSe2 compliance ESC 3L Save cursor position ESC 7 Restore cursor position ESC 8 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS Disable keyboard input ESC 2h Enable keyboard input ESC 21 Program function keys 105 Key Enhanced key key ASCII ANSI PC Style Unshifted Shifted F1 F6 F1 0 lt F2 F7 F2 1 F3 F8 F3 2 gt F4 F9 F4 3 F5 F10 F5 4 F6 F11 F6 5 A F7 F12 F7 6 B F8 F13 F8 7 C F9 F14 F9 8 D F10 Help F10 9 E F11 Do F11 F F12 F17 F12 G F13 F18 KR d F14 F19 a e F15 F20 b f F16 c g data data string of up to 29 characters a string delimiter any character except contained in string COLOUR ESC Q key data Set foreground amp background colour fg and bg are integers as listed below Dull Colour Bold 0 Black 8 1 Blue 9 2 Green 10 3 Cyan
70. make the key definition action locally or uncheck it to transmit the definition to the host when the key or key combination is pressed 4 Click the Add button to accept the definition The new definition will be added to the Current Macro Definitions list Keyboard Configuration Entering Control Characters You can enter a control character either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the control character for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the lt and gt characters in the key definition box You m
71. memory to the printer HP 700 92 96 Emulation Device Modes F1 Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Modes function labels to be displayed The keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the following section entitled Device Modes To Ext Dev F2 This toggle function determines whether data is sent to the printer or not Data will be sent to the printer when an asterisk is displayed on this button To Display F3 This toggle function determines whether data is sent to the display or not Data will be sent to the display when an asterisk is displayed on this button Advance Page F4 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F4 will cause paper in the printer to be advanced to the top of the next page Advance Line F5 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F5 will cause paper in the printer to be advanced by one line Copy All F6 When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function clicking this button or pressing F6 will cause a copy of all lines from and including the cursor line to the last line in display memory to be sent to the printer The cursor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the current line has been printed You can cancel printing at the end of the current line by pressing Return Note If the cursor is positioned on
72. menu 6 1 Setup Menus To close a menu Mouse Click anywhere outside the menu Keyboard Press the Alt key Using The Menus The menu options follow several conventions Options that are displayed dimmed are not applicable to the current mode of operation and cannot be selected An example of this is the IBM 5250 option in the Settings menu This can only be selected when the IBM 5250 emulation is running Options that include an underlined character may be actioned by pressing the key bearing that character For example pressing the X key while the File menu is displayed will cause the emulator to shut down Options that are not followed by an ellipsis perform a particular function when selected For example selecting Reset Terminal in the File menu will perform a terminal reset Options that are followed by an ellipsis indicate that a dialog box will be displayed with all the selections applicable to that option For example selecting Emulation in the Settings menu will display a dialog box in which you can specify various emulation settings To select a menu option Mouse Click the menu option Keyboard Method 1 If the option includes an underlined character press the key bearing that character For example pressing X while the File menu is displayed will cause the emulator to shut down Method 2 Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the option required then hit Return Setup
73. mode ANSI BBS Sco Console HP 700 92 96 or IBM 3151 mode 2 4 Getting Started TE Client Connection Wizard Aux Port Settings Ausilliary Port COM Configure lt Back Cancel 12 When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager 13 In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 4 then click the Connect button 2 5 Getting Started Terminal Emulation Configuration Emulation Options The Emulation options in the Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box are as follows The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The AIXTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive an X terminal using X Windows The ANSI BBS emulation is a derivative of the ANSI device driver ANSI SYS supplied with all DOS based PCs and which provides the screen management for the DOS console screen PC based UNIX systems and Bulletin Board Systems BBS often rely on the ANSI emulation when being accessed by a PC The AT 386 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the AT amp T AT 386 terminal The DG 410 412 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Data General D
74. of the ASCII character For example the default ASCII character CR can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references End of Block Characters Factory default None This specifies the characters that are to indicate the end of a block of data To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the ASCII character CR can be entered by typing the characters 3 and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references 6 62 Setup Menus Attributes Foreground _ Background
75. on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys You can assign up to six functions to each button either entering your own definition in the same format as described for keyboard macros and soft buttons or selecting from a list of standard built in functions Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a drop down list box which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned Unassigned Send CR Select Send Keyword Extend Selection Middle Button Edit Copy Select Rectangle Edit Paste Select Word Show Hotspots Select and Copy Action Hotspot Cursor Select Move Cursor Rectangular Select and Copy The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position working left to right across the entire width of the display whereas the Select Rectan gle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined by the start position top left corner and the finish position bottom right corner The Select Word function will cause the word under the mouse cursor to be selected The Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically The Rectangular Select and Copy function is the same as Select Rectangle but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically The Show Hotspots and Action Hotspots functions are described in the Hotspots section of the Getting Started chapter The Send Keyword function is very simi
76. or in a formatted page regardless of the setting of this option When unselected the cursor will remain at the end of the current line and each new character sent to the display will overwrite the character already occupying the cursor position 6 28 Setup Menus Auto LF Factory default Unselected The setting of this option in conjunction with that of the Auto New Line option determines the destination of the cursor when the Return key is pressed or the CR character is received When both this and the Auto New Line options are unselected the cursor will move to the first position of the current line when the Return key is pressed or the CR character is received When this is unselected and Auto New Line is selected the cursor will move to the first position of the next line when the Return key is pressed When this is selected and Auto New Line is unselected the cursor will move to the first position of the next line when the Return key is pressed or the CR character is received When both this and the Auto New Line options are selected the cursor will move to the first position of the line after the next line when the Return key is pressed Auto New Line Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Return key When unselected the Return key will generate a CR carriage return character When selected the Return key will generate a CR and an LF line feed characte
77. or you can remove the entire toolbar from the display A button tool is removed by selecting it in the Current Tool list box then clicking the Delete Current button To remove the toolbar from the display deselect the Visible check box Saving The Button Tools When you have finished defining button tools you can save them so that they will be reasserted when the emulator is loaded or reset by selecting Save Session in the File menu The Toolbar Notes 5 6 Setup Menus Setup Menus This chapter describes the options available in the setup menus and dialog boxes Displaying amp Closing Menus The following menus can be displayed from the command bar Factory Default v Clipboard Text Language gt Reset Terminal Clipboard Graphics a Emulation New Connection Open Session Save Session Save Session As Printer Setup SE Print Screen Clear Buffer Serial Print Buffer Ausport Auto Print Terminal Local Editing Eject Page Block Transmission Exit Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Action Button Tools Note The options available in the menus depend on whether or not you are in WBT mode To display a menu Mouse Click on the title of the menu required Keyboard Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined character in the menu title For example pressing Alt F will display the File
78. page Block mode ESC Set current line to 40 double width columns ESC 8 Set current line to 80 single width columns ESC 9 Set max number of pages for display Block mode ESC p Set page size to 24 lines by 40 characters ESCt Start field Block mode GS Start field extended Block mode ESC display data case Start enhanced colour field Block mode ESC Define field using pre defined attributes Block mode FS Write message m on 25th line ESC 0 m EDITING Delete character Block mode ESC P Delete line Block mode ESCM Disable local line editing Block mode ESCN Erase to end of line field ESCK Erase to end of page memory ESCJ Insert character Block mode ESCO Insert line Block mode ESCL Reset modified data tags Block mode ESC gt GENERAL OPERATION Data compression Enhanced Block mode DC2 Data compression Limited Block mode DC4 Define data type table Block mode ESCr Define data type table extended Block mode ESC r Define update variable table Block mode ESC s Delay processing for one second ESC End of transmission Block mode EOT Enter protect submode Block mode ESC W Exit protect submode Block mode ESC X Execute self tests ESC P Execute self test while loading ESC z Print current screen Conv or selected page Block ESC 0 zero Read buffer Block mode ESC lt Read emulation configuration ESC Read with address Block mode ESC Read with address extended Block mode ESC J
79. paper 8 0 inches wide Paper Source 1 only Continuous form paper 13 2 inches wide Paper Source 1 only A3 sized paper 297 mm x 420 mm B4 sized paper 257 mm x 364 mm Ledger sized paper 11 inches x 17 inches This specifies the envelope format to be used The possible settings are Don t Report NONE MFR BS MON N9 N10 C5 DL ASCII 899 Support No value returned No envelope source is defined The system determines the envelope type used based on the manufacturer type and model of the printer B5 sized envelopes 176mm x 250mm Monarch sized envelopes 3 875 x 7 5 inches Number 9 sized envelopes 3 875 x 8 875 inches Number 10 sized envelopes 4 125 x 9 5 inches C5 sized envelopes 162mm x 229mm DL sized envelopes 110mm x 220mm Specifies whether the single byte printer has ASCII code page 899 installed Select ing Don t Report will cause no value to be returned WSCST Name Specifies the name of the object containing pointers to the work station customizing tables WSCST Library Specifies the library name of the object containing pointers to the work station customizing tables 2 18 Getting Started Serial Connection Settings The Serial Configuration dialog box can be displayed from the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box by setting the Connection Type to Serial then clicking the Advanced button or the New Connection dialog box when in non WBT mode
80. rates for the port selected for host communications Parity Factory default None This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character If the number of Data Bits is 8 set this option to None Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0 Flow Control Factory default Input This option specifies the type of flow control used by the line port to communicate readiness to transmit or receive data from the host None No flow control Input XON XOFF on received data Output XON XOFF on transmitted data 6 47 Setup Menus In Out XON XOFF on transmitted amp received data Hardware DTR CTS hardware flow control Data Bits Factory default 8 This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character Stop Bits Factory default 1 This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character Transmit Rate Factory default Unlimited The setting of this option determines the maximum effective baud rate that the emulator transmits terminal reports and data sent as a result of pasting data to the
81. stored and F is the number of the Fn key pressed Note If you press a pre recorded Fn key its contents will be replaced with the following keystrokes You can also remove the contents of the Fn key before recording by pressing the Delete key Enter the keystrokes to be recorded You may pause recording at any time to allow keystrokes to be entered manually when played back by pressing Pause Pause mode is indicated by RA To continue recording press Pause again Note You can cancel the newly recorded keystrokes by pressing the Quit key This cancellation does not affect the previously recorded keystrokes 4 To finish and save the recording press the Record key Playback Keystrokes 1 Position the text cursor where the playback is to start 2 Press the Play key to enter Play mode The status line will display PLAY and a series of boxes representing the Fn keys A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded keystrokes Press the Fn key storing the recorded data to play back Playback will begin immediately as indicated by a P on the status line All the recorded keystrokes will be played back automatically When playback is com pleted the P will disappear If the recorded keystrokes included Pause then playback will halt at that point to allow you to enter keystrokes manually Press Play to resume playback from where you stopped typing If you want to cancel during the
82. the host operating system not the application Do Not Enter The Do Not Enter X symbol will appear when input from the keyboard or mouse will not be accepted by the host except Reset and SysReq Symbols to the right of this will indicate the reason Pressing the Reset key will remove some of these symbols from the status line Note that the emulation includes typeahead capability so that in most cases you can continue to enter data without waiting for the Do Not Enter message to clear as the data will be stored until the host is ready X PROGnnn Indicates that a programming error in the data from the host has been detected possibly due to incompatible application soft ware Press the Reset or SysReq key to remove this indicator and unlock the keyboard Le Indicates that you must wait while the requested function is performed XANUM Indicates that you tried to enter an invalid character into a nu meric field when the numeric lock feature was active The keyboard numeric lock feature can be overridden by using a Shift key The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator removed by pressing the Reset key XK Indicates that you tried to enter data in the wrong location This will occur when you attempt to do any of the following Enter insert erase or delete a character when the cursor is ina protected field or at a field attribute location 10 7 IBM 3270 Emulation X SYSTEM LES Perform a cursor select operation
83. the next line when a carriage return command is received When a serial port is selected clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box in which you can specify the baud rate parity flow control data bits and stop bits settings These options are described in the Serial Settings section Configuration of COM1 Baud Rate Data Bits so d Bau Stop Bits Cancel None e 1 X ema Elow Control Input hud Direct Print Data To A Network Printer To direct print data to a printer on the network select Use Network Printer LPR and enter the LPD Hostname Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box which enables you to specify various print settings You must specify the Printer Name The Job Name and User Name entries are optional the User Name will default to root if none is specified You can specify how many times the LPR protocol will attempt to execute the print job before cancelling by setting the number of Retries and the number of seconds delay between each attempt When Add Banner is selected information about this print job will be printed with it You can display a message box which will indicate the progress of the print job by selecting Debug Information Network Printer LPR Options x LFD Device ee Printer Name Ir Job Name SY User Name Us Number of Copies po Retries po Retry Delay jo Secs I Add Banner T Debug Information Cancel 2 24 Getti
84. then click the Set Colour button to display the Colour dialog box Color 127 xi Basic colors GI LEE Define Custom Colors gt gt Canca This shows the basic and custom colours currently available for selection If you want to use one of these click on the colour required then click OK If you want to define a different custom colour click the Define Custom Colours button to display the colour definition facilities Color HP Basic colors WI JI WII TIR WII See WI PPD 4 EERE EEE EERE WI Custom colors BEEBE lem Hue HO Red 255 See ee eee Sat 240 Green 255 Define Custom Colors Color Lum ha Blue fo Add to Custom Colors This provides two methods for specifying a different colour one visual and the other numeric All the settings initially displayed relate to the colour selected in the Attributes dialog box and shown in the large Colour box When you start changing any of the settings the Colour box will display the new colour 6 66 Setup Menus Visual Method The full range of colours available is displayed in the large colour selection box A target cursor is positioned over the currently selected colour To select a new colour you can either click on the colour required or drag the target cursor over it The colour displayed in the Colour box will change accordingly The lightness of the selected colour can be altered by dragging the triangular pointer up or down the
85. to enable Display Functions mode then press Ctrl together or the Esc key followed by the charac ters amp d and the attribute character which for underline is D The key definition should look like this if the F1 key was defined to enable the underline attribute IB LABEL METETA t amp dD For any other attribute or combination of attributes substitute the last character in the second line D in the example above with the relevant character from the following table A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O S Half Brightness eee eieeiee Underline ooo oojo Inverse Video ee ee o o e o Flashing e e e e e e LU e Invisible e End Attribute e When you have finished assigning character attribute commands to f keys press F9 to exit from the User Key Definition menu then F10 to enable the User Keys and display the defined attribute labels 9 16 IBM 3270 Emulation 10 IBM 3270 Emulation This chapter describes features of the IBM 3270 terminal emulation Introduction The IBM 3270 emulator provides emulation of all four models of the IBM 3278 alphanumeric terminal and also supports the IBM 3287 1 printer The terminal emulation supports Extended Attribute mode which allows different representation of highlighted fields and permits host definition of text colours Note that you can modify colours using the Attribute Settings dialog box
86. to the TCP IP Connection Settings section later in this chapter for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section later in this chapter for details The IBM 3270 emulation enables you to specify up to four hosts and you can use keyboard commands to switch between the sessions as described in the JBM 3270 Emulation chapter Enter the name or internet address of the host computer s in the Host box es then click Advanced for Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section later in this chapter for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next to display the Automate Login Process dialog box The Automate Login Process dialog box gives you the option to automate part or all of the host login procedure Refer to the Automate Login Process section later in this chapter for details TE Client Connection Wizard Automate Login Process m Parameters en r Script Act on Send Wat For Text Keyboard Lock Keyboard Unlock Sec Ekel gt lt Back Cancel Make the relevant selections if required then click Next to display the Printer Port Settings dialog box The next dialog box in the Connection Wizard enables you to specify Printer Port Settings Refe
87. together followed by the key bearing the first character then the key bearing the second character Note The compose character sequence can also be initiated by pressing a key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key name A compose character sequence may be abandoned before completion by pressing the Delete key Pressing Alt C or the key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key name again before completing a compose character sequence will cause it to be abandoned and a second sequence to be started An invalid compose character sequence will cause the bell to sound Keyboard Configuration The following tables use several conventions The keys bearing the characters used to compose a special character may be pressed in any order unless in order is specified DEC Multinat indicates that the character can only be composed if the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to DEC MCS Latin 1 indicates that the character can only be composed if the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multina tional and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to ISO Latin 1 If a nationality is specified with the character description for example Dutch then the character can only be composed when the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Setting
88. top of the display are deleted to make way for the new data The Log Top function enables the data that is removed from the top of the display to be sent to the printer when the To Ext Dev function is activated in the Device Control menu Note Both the emulation and the host must be using the ENQ ACK or Xon Xoff handshakes or a baud rate that is no higher than the rate supported by the printer Log Top remains activated until either this button or F4 is pressed again Log Bottom is activated a reset is performed or the emulation is exited Note This function does not take effect when Memory Lock is activated Margins Tabs amp Start Column ear ea Pas ee ee Ee This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key which is equivalent to the HP 700 92 96 User System key then F2 These functions enable you to redefine the start column set tabs and specify the left and right margins Start Column F1 This function is used to temporarily redefine the start column for transmitted data when no logical start of text pointer is present and the Return or Enter keys are pressed in Modify Line or Modify All mode Note The default start column is specified in the HP Settings dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details Usually a start of text pointer is automatically generated to designate the leftmost character in the current line if it is the last line of data in display memory The pointer will remain in di
89. when the cursor is not in a valid cursor select field The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator removed by pressing the Reset key Indicates that you cannot enter any data because the application program has disabled the keyboard following an entry Indicates that you attempted to insert characters into an unpro tected field when the cursor was at the end of the field or you attempted to word wrap to the next line when there were not enough spaces to enable a word wrap The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator removed by pressing the Reset key Typing Direction gt OI lt This indicates the direction in which characters are displayed on the screen when typed The direction is toggled between left to right normal and right to left by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad Bilingual Keyboard Mode NorL Shift NUM This indicates whether the National N or Latin L character set is active when a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard is selected Pressing the keys Shift on the keypad will toggle between the two character sets This indicates that the numeric lock function is enabled and the current cursor is in a numeric field When the numeric lock function is on the current cursor is in an unprotected field and the keyboard is in lowercase shift you can only use the 0 to 9 decimal sign minus and Dup keys Mode Symbol A This symbol indicates that the keyboard is in I
90. x Columns 5291 1 Monochrome 24 x 80 5292 2 Colour 24 x 80 5251 _ 11 Monochrome 24 x 80 3179_2 Colour 24 x 80 default 3196_Al1 Monochrome 24 x 80 3180_2 Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FC Colour 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FG Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3486_BA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HC Colour 24 x 80 5555_B01 Monochrome 24 x 80 5555_C01 Colour 24 x 80 The printer models supported are listed below 3812 1 Single byte printer 5553 B01 Double byte printer If double byte character sets e g Japanese are supported and you wish to use them then select either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing 6 Specify if you want the right or left Control keys to perform the same function as the keypad Enter or Reset keys respectively 7 Specify the IBM5250 Monochrome setting Note that all IBM 5250 models support both monochrome and colour display When monochrome is selected characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white When monochrome is not selected the settings specified in the Attributes dialog box described in the Setup Menus chapter will be used for the display 8 Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the
91. you to specify printer settings If you find a through print results in data being split into lines each treated as a separate print job specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box e g 5 seconds This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely When set to 0 printing will not start until a print end of job command is received from the host Entering any other number will cause printing to start after the specified number of seconds have elapsed regardless of whether the print end of job command has been received from the host 6 11 Setup Menus Direct Print Data To A Specific Port To direct print data to a specific port select Print Direct To Port and specify the Printer Port Selecting the FormFeed Terminator option will cause the printer to advance the paper to the top of the form when it has finished printing The Output Character Set option enables you to specify the character set used for printing when Print Direct To Port is selected This allows non ISO Latin 1 printers to be used Selecting Auto Line Feed will cause the printer to print at the beginning of the next line when a carriage return command is received When a serial port is selected clicking the Setup button will display a dialog box in which you can specify the baud rate parity flow control data bits and stop bits set
92. 102 keyboards you can also use Shift Fn The status line will display R F where R indicates you are in Record mode hh is the number of keystrokes that may be stored and F is the number of the Fn key pressed Note Ifyou press a pre recorded Fn key its contents will be replaced with the following keystrokes You can also remove the contents of the Fn key before recording by pressing the Delete key Enter the keystrokes to be recorded You may pause recording at any time to allow keystrokes to be entered manually when played back by pressing Pause To continue recording press Pause again Note You can cancel the newly recorded keystrokes by pressing the Quit key This cancellation does not affect the previously recorded keystrokes 10 12 IBM 3270 Emulation 4 To finish and save the recording press the Record key Playback Keystrokes You can play back the contents of an Fn key as normal or one keystroke at a time The following procedure describes normal play back For one keystroke play back select Single Step Macros in the Notice Board Setup dialog box 1 2 Position the text cursor where the playback is to start Press the Play key to enter Play mode The status line will display PLAY and a series of boxes representing the Fn keys A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded keystrokes Press the Fn key storing the recorded data to play back Playback
93. 11 4 Red 12 5 Magenta 13 6 Yellow 14 7 White 15 ESC 2 fg bg m C 29 Host Command Summary Set inverse amp foreground amp background colour as above ESC 7 fg bg m Set normal foreground colour integer as above ESC F Set normal background colour integer as above ESC G Set reverse foreground colour integer as above ESC H Set reverse background colour integer as above ESC I Set graphic foreground colour integer as above ESC J Set graphic background colour integer as above ESC K Request current colour attribute integer as above ESC M CONTROLLING THE SCREEN DISPLAY Assign attribute s to following characters ESC m Default attributes 0 Bold on 1 Underline on 4 Flashing on 5 Inverse video on 7 Blank 8 Fill regions with attribute integer as below ESC L 0 Fill with current attribute 2 Select iBCSe2 compliance 1 Fill with normal attribute 3 Deselect iBCSe2 compliance Select page 1 6 ESC z Clear page FF Scroll display up lines insert blank lines ESC S Scroll display down lines insert blank lines ESC T Access bank amp 2 characters using decimal values ESC g 0 255 Clear tab stops 0 cursor position 3 all ESC g CURSOR Move cursor to specified column integer ESC or ESC G Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor down lines ESC B or ESC e Move cursor right columns ESC
94. 132 column display by pressing the function key F12 and you can divide the display memory into 2 4 6 or 8 pages from the HP Settings dialog box as described in the Setup Menus chapter Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where HP 700 92 96 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the HP 700 92 96 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the HP virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box v 6 INSERT DELETE CLEAR menu UKEY f USYST UKEYS INSERT HOME PREV MODE UP PAGE DELETE HOME NEXT CHAR DOWN PAGE SCR Scroll Control key usage Normal key usage INSERT LINE All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps Functions in brackets are generated when the keys are shifted TXMIT 1noAe7 pseogAey Ly p vueyug uoHeINWF 96 66 00Z dH HP 700 92 96 Emulation Buttons amp Function Keys The buttons along the bottom of the HP 700 92 96 window indicate the current function of keys F1 through F8 on the keyboard each key and equivalent button having several functions within the emulation The buttons and equivalent function keys enable selec
95. 1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hazeltine 1500 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals The TVI 910 TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910 920 and 925 terminals respec tively as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals 3 Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box 4 Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 5 When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details All the Wyse associated emulations are configured via the Wyse Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter Note that some settings may not apply to the particular
96. 168 lines stored off screen giving a total display memory of 192 lines This option enables you to specify whether display memory is divided into 2 4 6 or 8 pages Typeahead Enabled Factory default Unselected When the emulator is connected to an HP 3000 you normally have to wait for the host to send a prompt before you can enter new data at the keyboard otherwise the data is ignored Selecting this option will enable you to type continuously without waiting for the prompt Data is stored in the keyboard buffer and each time the emulator receives a prompt it will send a line of data to the host Block mode also supports typeahead Host Prompt Character Factory default Q i e DC1 Some hosts send a prompt character to the terminal to indicate that they are ready to receive the next line or block of data This option enables you to specify the prompt character for your particular host Most hosts either use the DC1 Q character e g HP 3000 or no prompt character When Typeahead Enabled is selected the emulator will wait for the specified prompt character from the host before transmitting the next line from the keyboard buffer 6 25 Setup Menus IBM 3151 Settings IBM 3151 Settings EN Operating Mode Row and Column Turnaround Char Edo 24 x20 z Jcr R m Forcing Insert Insert Character Tab Operation Both G space Field D Enter Key gt pReturnKey Send Operation
97. 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details DEC VT Emulations The Status Bar The status bar along the bottom of the display enables you to switch between modes and show the status of various operations Local Pause VT500 7 Bit 1 1 001 001 Overstrike Mode J Printer Ready Aux Ready 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Item 1 This displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or not data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when there is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Item 2 This button enables you to switch between Local and Online mode The label indicates the mode you will switch to if the button is clicked Item 3 This button enables you to Pause or Resume scrolling data in the window The label indicates the act
98. 410 and D412 terminals Refer to the DG 410 412 Emulation chapter for details The HP 700 92 96 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett Packard 700 92 2392A 2622A 70094 and 70096 terminals This emulation is described in detail in the HP 700 92 96 Emulation chapter The HZ1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hazeltine 1500 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The IBM 3151 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the IBM 3151 terminal Refer to the BM 3151 Emulation chapter for information on this emulation The IBM 3270 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the IBM 3270 terminal Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode NVT mode for short The setting of the IBM 3270 Model option determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes are supported Refer to the JBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details The IBM 5250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive IBM 5250 type alphanumeric terminals This emulation can be used for connection to an IBM AS 400 System 36 or System 38 Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode NVT mode for short Refer to the JBM 5250 Emulation chapter for details Sco C
99. 5 Invisible reverse Invisible reverse amp underline 6 Reverse and flash gt Reverse underline amp flash 7 Invisible reverse amp flash Invisible reverse underline amp flash Attributes occupy a character space ESC F0 Attributes do not occupy a character space ESC F 1 Half intensity mode ESC 5h Full intensity mode ESC 51 Page base attribute mode ESC 2h Line base attribute mode ESC 21 Select status line visual attribute s ESC 3 v 0 Normal 2 Normal underline 1 Reverse 3 Reverse underline Set cursor style to ESC 0 Cursor not displayed 3 Flashing underline cursor 1 Flashing block cursor 4 Steady underline cursor 2 Steady block cursor Enable 132 columns per line ESC 3h Enable 80 columns per line ESC 31 EDITING MODES Autowrap mode on ESC 7h Autowrap mode off ESC 71 New line mode on ESC 6h New line mode off ESC 61 DOWN key sends CTRL J ESC 9h DOWN key sends CTRL V ESC 91 Turn on write protect mode ESC Turn off write protect mode ESC Turn on protect mode ESC amp Turn off protect mode ESC C 37 Host Command Summary EDITING DATA Enable page edit mode ESCN Enable line edit mode ESCO Enable insert mode ESC q Enable replace mode ESCr Load a replacement character ESC e Insert a replacement character at cursor position ESCQ Insert replacement characters at cursor position ESC Insert line of replacement characters on current line ESCE Insert lines of replacement charac
100. 50 CHARACTER SET oO 0n _ oO a a A IL O OIN I OD oO AI OIN lee CH 3 SIXI AIM a C Ol lt amp a e HIT 245 OCTAL DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL A m xs a This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode and is the secondary character set when the Code Page option in the Wyse Settings dialog box is set to 850 B 16 Character Sets WY 60 PC EQUIVALENT CHARACTER SET IO nmol O Bw pl Zlo ONN NO O Ofna aA a Alo w lM My h ls jo o o 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 KEREN mers zk OH zlral cleal N lt x S el C aA OI ID VU Xt a 1 40 Oo D ei e lt lt Bio lt gt r ti g eoe 33 OCTAL KEY 27 DECMaAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode B 17 Character Sets WY 60 STANDARD ASCII CHARACTER SET COLUMN O 0 aM M L L ro a om IO nm o olol Pl 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DO aT a n Tl o gt m Ni lt x S lt c 4 0 0 0 9 V ol 33 OCTAL KEY B 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode
101. Alt A WY_CHARSET Escape WY_ESC Fl F16 WY_F1 WY_F16 Function WY_FUNCT Home WY_HOME Notes Insert WY_INSERT To obtain the virtual key names for shifted Keypad 5 WY Ka functions of the keys listed at left substitute Page Down WY_PAGEDOWN WY_ with WY_S_ Page Up WY_PAGEUP The virtual key names listed above are Print WY_PRINT alternative names that can be used Return WY_RETURN Tab WY_TAB A 7 Virtual Key Names Notes A 8 Character Sets Character Sets This appendix shows the supported character sets Introduction Each character set consists of a series of control characters and displayable charac ters Displayable characters are alphanumeric symbolic or graphic characters that can be displayed on the screen or printed by a hardcopy device Control characters enable the terminal emulation or the printer to perform specific tasks such as a line feed or carriage return These will be actioned when received from the host or when the emulator is in local mode and they are entered from the keyboard Note When the Display Controls option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is selected a representation of most control characters received will be displayed on the screen instead of actioned To enter a control character from the keyboard first find the displayable character equivalent by adding 64 to the decimal value of the control character in the relevant character set table For example the contr
102. B HEXADECIMAL B 12 Character Sets COLUMN DG 410 412 LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET O 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 zk OH OCTAL DECIMAL HEXADECIMAL B 13 Character Sets WYSE NATIVE MODE CHARACTER SET COLUMN O 0 aM gM L L IO nm o olol Pl 2 3 4 5 E 6 A 7 B 8 9 DO aT a n Tl o gt m Ni lt x S lt c 4 0 0 0 9 V ol 35 OCTAL KEY L 29 DECIMAL 1D HEXADECIMAL This character set is used by all Wyse emulations and associated emulations In WY 60 mode this is the default primary character set B 14 Character Sets WY 60 MULTINATIONAL CODE PAGE 437 CHARACTER SET R O W 0 _ Led L LL m H t H 8 IL i A Fr H O OINI OO oO A OIN leie CH Kim e Cl Oll EN DM e 8o b olana zgr gmana Emi m 245 OCTAL DECIMAL A5 HEXADECIMAL A m lt a This Wyse character set is only available in WY 60 mode and is the secondary character set when the Code Page option in the Wyse Settings dialog box is set to 437 B 15 Character Sets WY 60 MULTINATIONAL CODE PAGE 8
103. Caps Lock Paez d mo g XmitFnetn A r c Dean eo me Return Def M Start Cake FidSeparator _ Blk Terminator IT Typeahead Enabled To Host Prompt Character Cancel This dialog box is displayed by selecting HP 700 92 96 in the Settings menu Local Echo Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host When unselected characters are not displayed when they are transmitted to the host unless the host echoes them back Caps Lock Factory default Unselected This determines whether the full 128 character ASCII range can be generated or only Teletype compatible codes When this option is unselected all 128 ASCII characters can be generated When selected unshifted alphabetic keys will generate their shifted equivalents For example the A key unshifted will generate an uppercase A and the and keys will generate LA and respectively The key for generating and is disabled XmitFnctn A Factory default Unselected This option determines whether escape sequences generated by control and function keys are sent to the host or only to the terminal emulation When unselected escape sequences are only sent to the terminal emulation When selected escape sequences are sent to the host If the Local Echo option is selected the sequences will also be sent to the terminal emulation 6 20
104. Delete character RSK Delete line RS FI Delete line between margins RS F Erase window FF Erase screen RS FE Erase unprotected RS FF Erase to end of line VT Insert character RSJ Insert line RSFH Insert line between margins RSF GENERAL Bell BEL Read horizontal scroll offset RSFO Read model ID RSC Reset RSFA Select ANSI mode RS F Select 7 8 bit operation 0 7 bit 1 8 bit RS F U bit Select character set RS F S lt nn gt Set keyboard language 0 match native language 1 US ASCII amp DG International RS Ff Shift in RSN Shift out RSO PRINTING Form bit dump RS F 6 Window bit dump RS F 5 Print form SOH Print pass through on RS F Print pass through off RS Fa Print window DC C 20 Host Command Summary DG 410 412 ANSI Standard Mode CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Change attributes CSI count on off q CURSOR Backspace BS Carriage return CR Cursor left columns CSI D Cursor right columns CSI C Cursor down lines CSI B Cursor up lines CSI A Cursor position line column CSI 1 c f Cursor position line column CSI I H Form feed FF Index ESCD Insert space characters CSI Insert lines CSI L New line LF Next line ESCE EDITING Delete character s from cursor CSI P Delete lines from amp including cursor line CSI M End protected area ESC w Erase line portion 0 from cursor to 2 all CSI K Erase window portion 0 from cursor 1 to 2
105. EE TE EEAS 11 1 Non WBT Mode iman Cirer oiii e eek E EET E aa 11 3 Network Virtual Terminal Mode n se 11 5 The Status LANG ss sni a vette es ee EARE E E ees TE 11 5 Keyboard Manning 11 6 Word Processing Mode AAA 11 6 Text Display Option 11 8 Record amp Playback Keystrokes Facility cccccccccsccssscsesteeesteeeees 11 9 Recording Keystrokes 00 ce ee ceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeesecaeecaecnaeeaes 11 9 Playback Keystrokes scrire esenski ie e ri S 11 10 E topt deg eegene tien a E R E 11 10 Fax Image Support 11 11 IBM 3151 Emulation ccccccccsccecesenenreecsesseesesees 12 1 Introduction aii aie e thas a EEE E E AES 12 1 Session Configuration sssssssssessesseesesserssessssesssesssessressressresees 12 1 KEE 12 1 Non W Bil MOG6 evista vaceticedazes dees ittel ER 12 2 ThesStatus BOR eevee ee eege ee EE Eer 12 3 Keyboard Manning 12 4 Defining Function KOS ccccccccsccscesssscesssseeecsssececssssecessseeeeesseaeees 12 6 TA6530 Emulation 11cecccccccceceesnesnnenreeeeenenseens 13 1 SESSION CONFIQUIALION aniisi inaina n Eae E E E EE N a 13 1 WBT Modessa a A E E a o 13 1 Non WBT M dena re E E ETA EE EE TEE 13 2 Phe stalus Line eraren a ae E E A EAR 13 3 Operating Moder eioi i A a Ea EE ia Ra 13 4 Contents 5 Contents The R le EE 13 5 Ke boa rd M ppint resesi ea E E ETE 13 5 Wyse Emulations ssnnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 14 1 Session Configuration sessrtirrssrrisiririhriristhkini E ntie AENEA
106. Edit menu Individual items in the Edit menu can be disabled by using the following registry entries Disable Clipboard Text item Disable Clipboard Graphics item Disable Copy item Disable Paste item Disable Select All item Disable Clear Buffer item ClipboardText off ClipboardGraphics off Copy off Paste off SelectAll off ClearBuffer off 15 14 Initialization Commands Disable Settings Menu Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting MS on SettingsMenu off These commands will disable the Settings menu Individual items in the Settings menu can be disabled by using the following registry entries Disable Attributes item Disable Block Transmission item Disable BQ3107 item Disable Emulation item Disable HP2392A item Disable IBM 3151 item Disable IBM 3270 item Disable IBM5250 item Disable Keyboard Macros item Disable Local Editing item Disable Mouse Buttons item Disable Serial item Disable Soft Buttons item Disable TA6526 item Disable Terminal item Disable Unisys T27 item Disable Wyse item Disable Tools Menu Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting MO on ToolsMenu off Attributes off BlockTransmission off BQ3107 off Emulation off hp2392a off Ibm3151 off Ibm3270 off Ibm5250 off KeyboardMacros off LocalEditing off MouseButtons off Serial off SoftButtons off ta6526 off Termin
107. Fill rectangular area ESC f t l b Sr x f Decimal code of fill character b Bottom line border t Top line border r Right column border Left column border Selective erase rectangular area ESC t l b r t Top line border b Bottom line border Left column border r Right column border Select attribute change extent ESC c x c character positions affected Stream of character positions 0 or 1 Rectangular area of character positions 2 Change attributes in rectangular area ESC t l b r a r t Top line border r Right column border Left column border a Visual character attributes b Bottom line border Reverse attributes in rectangular area ESC t l b r a t t Top line border r Right column border Left column border a Visual character attributes b Bottom line border VT420 REPORTS Tertiary device attribute request ESC c or ESC 0c Request extended cursor position report ESC 6n Request checksum of rectangular area ESC id p t zl b r y id Request label 21 Left column border p Page number b Bottom line border t Top line border r Right column border Request macro space report ESC 62n Request memory checksum report 1 request label ESC 63 In Request multiple session status report ESC 85n Request window report ESC v C 14 Host Command Summary AlXTerm Emulation All commands are supported in both VT100 and HFT High Function Te
108. For example you can cause a button to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The name has to be enclosed by the lt and gt characters in the Current Tool text box You may omit the VK_ VT_ parts etc of the virtual key name To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with characters and ending with the gt character For example to program a button so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the Current Tool text box lt ALT F4 gt To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program a button so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the Current Tool text box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Removing Button Tools You can remove individual button tools from the toolbar
109. Insert at Current button Note that the function of this new button will be the same as that of the previously selected button tool until you redefine it You can insert a space before the current button tool as it is displayed in the toolbar by selecting Space in the Commands list box then clicking the Insert at Current button The Toolbar You are not restricted to the set of predefined button bitmaps displayed in the Buttons list box You can add your own customised buttons to the bottom of the list by clicking the Add Custom button This will display the Load Custom Bitmap dialog box which enables you to select a bitmap file from which a button will be automatically generated Specify the name of the bitmap file to use then click the OK button The dialog box will close and you will see the new button bitmap highlighted at the bottom of the Buttons list box If you want to delete a custom button from the Buttons list box select the button bitmap then click the Delete Custom button DO NOT click the Delete Current button as this will remove the currently selected button tool from the toolbar Note that you cannot delete the predefined button bitmaps displayed by default Assigning Functions To Buttons You can assign a variety of functions to the buttons You can either enter a definition of your own or you can select a menu command from the Commands list box The buttons displayed in the toolbar by default are defined with some
110. Menu Bar amp Pop Up Menus Registry Entry None Command Line MB1 Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the menu bar from the emulator window and prevent access to pop up menus using keyboard commands 15 13 Initialization Commands Disable File Menu FileMenu off MF on Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting These commands will disable the File menu Individual items in the File menu can be disabled by using the following registry entries Disable Factory item Disable Reset item Disable New Connection item Disable OpenSession item Disable CloseSession item Disable Save Session item Disable Save Session As item Disable Startup Options item Disable File Transfer item Disable FTP item Disable Print Setup item Disable Print Screen item Disable Print Buffer item Disable Auto Print item Disable Cancel Print item Disable Eject Page item Disable Exit item Disable Edit Menu EditMenu off MD on Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting Factory off Reset off NewConnection off OpenSession off CloseSession off SaveSession off SaveSessionAs off StartupOptions off FileTransfer off FTP off PrintSetup off PrintScreen off Print Buffer off AutoPrint off CancelPrint off EjectPage off Exit off These commands will disable the
111. N EENE aSr 14 1 AnA e A BY Oa AAEE EE ESP E EE A E EEEN 14 1 Non W BT Mode nren aai e e i E E R en 14 2 Display Formal courir rosier iai E N EAE ES 14 4 Status Line Messages cccccscccessecsescesseceensecenceceeeeeseeeeaeceaeceeneeaes 14 4 Keyboard Mapping cccccccccccccccssseesseceenceeenceceeecesueeeeaaeeeaeceeeeeneeeens 14 5 Initialization CommandS sccccccccceseseeeeeeeseeees 15 1 INGODUCTION chain eI eas Sree aig Se eee Ue LET 15 1 Command SUMMATY o ecececccecescccsceceessceenceceeeeceeeeeseeeeaaeceeaeceeaeeennees 15 2 Host Connection oot inai nnen EE E EAKA EE EEE AA 15 5 Session Configuration esesesssssssesssesssesssessessseesressressreseresereseeesse 15 7 STE 1 POENAE PANAN IEI A NOAN EAA E E EA 15 9 Keyboard amp Mouse weccccccccccsccesssccesscceseceeeeseneesseceaaeceeaeeceaeeseaees 15 18 Virtual Key Names u 1s11ccssecesensseeesssensnsenenseseees A 1 Character SOUS siti cn seid issdstetiativercectadsssscdiesensaserars B 1 Host Command ZGummary seen C 1 VES 2 EMULAUON saai e E HAHA ANE NS C 1 ANSI VT100 Enmulation 0 cccccccccccccccscscsescccesssscessesecessaeeecseseeeneaas C 2 ANSI VT500 EMulation 0 ccccccccccccccsssscccsscscesscecesssseceseaececneseeeneaas C 6 ANST VISIO Emulation cccccccccccccccssscsesssscesecscesesaeceseaeeessesseeeneaas C 9 ANSI VT420 Emulation o cccccccccccssscecessececeessseceessececnssesecseaeseneaas C 12 AIXT erm Emula ON aier e a A E A A A O AANE C 15 DG 410 412 Emulation cccccccccccccccesss
112. N2123EP PAN4420HP 1BM42081 1BM4230 IBM47222 IBM5204 IBM6408EP HPIIP HP4 HP560C EPAP3250 EPFX850 EPLQ570 EPLQ2550 NECP2 NECP6200 OKI390IBM OKI400 PAN1123EP PANI191EP PAN2124EP PAN4430HP IBM42082 IBM4232 IBM4770 IBM5216 IBM6412 HPII HP310 HPPAINT EPAP5000 EPFX870 EPLQ860 EPSQ870 NECP2200 NECP6300 OKI391IBM OKI800 PANI124EP PAN1624EP PAN2180EP PAN4450IHP Specifies the name of the message queue to which operational messages for the printer are to be sent MSGQ Library Specifies the message queue library Font Specifies the font identifier and point size used by the single byte printer e g 11 Formfeed This is always set to Don t Report The Paper Source 1 option is used to specify the paper format to be used Paper Source 1 amp 2 These options specify the paper format to be used The possible settings are Don t Report NONE MFR No value returned No paper source is defined The system determines the paper type used based on the manufacturer type and model of the printer LET Letter sized paper 8 5 x 11 inches 2 17 Getting Started LEGL EXEC A4 A5 BS C80 C132 A3 B4 LEDG Envelope Hopper Legal sized paper 8 5 x 14 inches Executive sized paper 7 25 x 10 5 inches A4 sized paper 210 mm x 297 mm A5 sized paper 148 mm x 210 mm B5 sized paper 182 mm x 257 mm Continuous form
113. Options dialog box is selected the key mapped with the SysReq function enables you to toggle the display and keyboard entries between the host operating system and the application This enables you to switch to the operating system and issue a LOGOFF command When communicating with the operating system the status line will display the BI symbol Note Not all TN3270E servers provide full support of the SysReq key The Status Line The last line in the window is used to display status information in the form of symbols and alphanumeric characters A coloured line separates status information from the rest of the display Information is displayed in any of nine regions within the status line as listed below 1 Readiness amp System Connection Symbol Colour Column Meaning T Blue 1 Telnet session running A Blue 2 Online non SNA 7 Blue 3 Network Virtual Terminal mode 8 Blue 3 My job IBM emulation screen E Blue 3 Host operating system mode 2 Do Not Enter Symbol Colour Column Meaning X PROGnnn Yellow 10 18 Program check nnn error code Le White 10 13 Terminal wait XANUM Red 10 15 Numeric data only XK Red 10 14 Go elsewhere X SYSTEM White 10 17 System lock Ki gt Red 10 13 Too much 3 Typing Direction Symbol Colour Column Meaning gt Blue 19 Typing direction left to right lt Blue 19 Typing direction right to left 10 5 IBM 3270 Emulation 4 Bilingual Keyboard Mode Sy
114. SC amp j A Enable amp display user function key labels ESC amp jB End user key definition mode ESC k Replace key labels with character string ESC amp j n L s Restore labels ESC amp jC GENERAL OPERATION 7 bits amp existing parity ESC amp kOI 8 bits amp no parity ESC amp k 11 Audible tone disabled ESC amp k0D Audible tone enabled ESC amp k1D Check parity no ESC amp s0Z Check parity yes ESC amp s1Z Configuration menus locked ESC Salt Configuration menus unlocked ESC amp q0L Data speed high ESC amp s1X Data speed low ESC amp s0X DC2 not inhibited ESC amp s0OH DC2 inhibited ESC amp s 1H Delay one second ESC Display functions mode disabled ESC Z Display functions mode enabled ESC Y Enter VT220 7 bit mode 25 line display keypad F1 F4 mapped to top left Fl F4 keys F5 F12 as per VT220 ESC amp k1 Hand shake not inhibited ESC amp s0G Hand shake inhibited ESC amp s1G Hard reset ESCE Local echo disabled ESC amp KkOL Local echo enabled ESC amp k1L Local mode disabled only for user f key ESC amp k1R Local mode enabled only for user f key ESC amp kOR Modem disconnect ESCf Self test ESCz Soft reset ESC g C 24 Host Command Summary KEYBOARD Auto keyboard lock off ESC amp k0OK Auto keyboard lock on ESC amp k1K Auto line feed mode off ESC amp kOA Auto line feed mode on ESC amp k1A Caps lock off ESC amp k0C Caps lock on ESC amp k1C Caps mode off ESC amp k0P Caps mode on ESC am
115. SH U S CANADIAN BILINGUAL amp NETHERLANDS CHARACTER SET gt gt gt gt A A vovoz zrace N lt x Sle cov O AI zl li OO oO AJOIN za N DI clel a E Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 23 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 ENGLISH U K CHARACTER SET p gt Sei gt A A QV e fk ie EA AM elt OC Ni lt SI Se cao O OI NI oO oO AJOJN za Di EI Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 24 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 DANISH amp NORWEGIAN CHARACTER SET gt gt w gt OI en D J K L M N 0 P Q R N lt xig lt c n v OJ OON OO oO IT WwW ND za Q N EI clcl clc Legend RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 25 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 FRENCH CHARACTER SET gt gt Sei gt A A y ovoz zr aAa aor Ni SI Sle claov O ON OO oO SI Go M za c N EI RSP required space SHY syllable hyphen SP space B 26 Character Sets IBM 3270 amp IBM 5250 GERMAN amp AUSTRIAN CHARACTER SET Oo gt
116. Selecting 10 1 Session configuration 10 1 Session selection 10 4 Setup 6 37 Specification D 3 Status line 10 5 SysReq key support 10 5 Text display options 10 9 Typing direction 10 9 Virtual key names A 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Bilingual keyboard support 11 8 Character sets Austrian B 27 Belgian B 31 Canadian bilingual B 23 Danish B 25 English UK B 24 English US B 23 Finnish B 30 French B 26 German B 27 Italian B 28 Netherlands B 23 Norwegian B 25 Spanish B 29 Swedish B 30 Swiss French B 31 Swiss German B 31 Close key 11 8 Display right to left 11 8 Display rule 6 44 Fax image support 11 11 Introduction 11 1 Keyboard mapping 11 6 Push mode 11 8 Record playback keystrokes 11 9 Selecting 11 1 Session configuration 11 1 Setup 6 43 Specification D 4 Status line 11 5 Text display options 11 8 Typing direction 11 8 Virtual key names A 5 Word Processing mode 11 6 IBM 5250 Printer Options 2 16 IBM EBCDIC Codepages B 32 Index 4 Index ICL 7561 Emulation Specification D 4 Initialization Commands Introduction 15 1 ISO Latin Multinational Set 6 52 K Key Mapping Changing 3 1 6 68 Displaying 3 1 6 68 Key Programming HP 700 92 96 emulation 9 13 IBM 3151 emulation 12 6 Macros menu 6 68 Keyboard Changing key functions 3 1 Composing characters 3 4 Cursor key mode 6 54 Defining keys 3 1 6 68 Enhanced AT mapping DEC VT500 functions 7 6 7 7 DG 410 412 functions 8 4 HP 700 92 96 function
117. UTES Set display attribute ESC 6 Normal video SP Inverse invisible d Dimmed Underline dim 1 Inverse video Underline italics 2 Italics 7 Underline inverse 4 Invisible Underline inverse dim 5 Underline 0 Underline inverse italics 6 Inverse dim Underline invisible 8 Inverse italics amp Underline inverse invisible Set video prior condition register attribute as above ESC 7 Set reset colour map table ESC q Read colour configuration Block mode ESC u Set colour configuration Block mode ESC t Read colour mapping table Block mode ESC v Set colour mapping table Block mode ESC x CURSOR Back tab Block mode ESCi Clear all tabs ESC 3 Clear tab at current position ESC 2 Move cursor down one line LF Move cursor home ESCH Move cursor home down ESC F Move cursor left one column BS Move cursor right one column ESCC Move cursor to beginning of current line CR Move cursor to next tab stop HT Move cursor up one line ESCA Report cursor address ESCa Set cursor address DC3 Set cursor address extended Block mode ESC D Set tab at current position ESC 1 DISPLAY Clear memory to spaces ESCI Clear memory to spaces extended ESC I Display message on 25th line ESC o Display next page Conversational mode ESCU Display previous page Conversational mode ESC V Display page ESC Scroll down one line Conversational mode ESCT Scroll up one line Conversational mode ESCS C 32 Host Command Summary Select
118. Unselected This will enable all screen data protected and unprotected in the selected area to be copied Refer to the Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details Copy Function Enabled Factory default Unselected This determines whether the copy functions are available for copying selected data to another area of the display or to a function key Single Step Macros Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will enable an Fn key macro to be played one keystroke at a time by pressing the spacebar for each keystroke after issuing a play Fn key command The status line will display the contents of the macro and the cursor position in the status line indicates the point that has been reached in the macro play back Refer to the Play Back Keystrokes section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details 6 42 Setup Menus IBM 5250 Settings IBM 5250 Settings m IBM 5250 Model I Monochrome Rule Line T Ignore host cursor style cross zl I Enhanced UI T Follows Cursor IT Hide WP Controls Font r Right to Left Options I Lucida Console x J Numeral Swap IT Symbol Swap Type UKB Unlock Delay 0 Keyboard SBCS CharSet 697 Se 285 E o Default This dialog box is displayed by selecting IBM 5250 in the Settings menu IBM 5250 Model Factory default 3179_2 This specifies what is reported back to th
119. Wyse PC Term Emulation MONITOR MODE Monitor mode on Monitor mode off SELECTING PERSONALITIES ESCU ESC u or ESCX Enhance mode off ESC v SPACE Enhance mode on ESC v Select WYSE 50 personality ESC v Select WYSE 50 personality ESC v Select WYSE ASCII personality ESC v4 Select TeleVideo 905 personality ESC vb Select TeleVideo 910 personality ESC v Select TeleVideo 925 personality ESC v Select TeleVideo 950 personality ESC v Select ADDS A2 personality ESC v Select PC Term personality ESC v5 Select HZ 1500 personality ESC v amp Select VT52 personality ESC v6 Select VT100 personality ESC v Select VT220 7 bit personality ESC v lt Select VT220 8 bit personality ESC v Select UNIX Console personality ESC v HOST COMMUNICATIONS Enable transmission CTRLQ Stop transmission CTRLS Send ACK CTRLE Full duplex mode on ESC CESC Half duplex mode on ESC CESC Block mode on ESC BESC Half duplex block mode on ESC B ESC Send terminal ID ESCM Assign COMM port as host port enhanced ESC eng Assign COMM 2 port as host port enhanced ESC eg Send time of day ESC SPACE 2 Enable DTR COMM port handshaking CTRLN Enable XON XOFF XPC COMM 1 port handshaking CTRLO TERMINAL amp KEYBOARD CONTROL Local edit mode on ESCk Duplex edit mode on ESC1 Sound bell CTRLG Unlock keyboard ESC Lock keyboard ESC Keyclick off ESC lt Keyclick on ESC gt CAPS LOCK on enhanced ESCe amp C 48 Host Command Summary
120. able File menu 15 14 Disable File menu items 15 14 Disable maximize button 15 11 Disable minimize button 15 11 Disable mouse editing 15 18 Disable scrollbar 15 15 Disable Settings menu 15 15 Disable Settings menu items 15 15 Disable status bar amp DEC status line 15 16 Disable System menu 15 11 Disable System menu amp Min Max buttons 15 12 Disable tool buttons on command bar 15 12 Disable Tools menu 15 15 New session warning message 15 5 Reflection 4 colour support 15 17 Soft buttons displayed 15 16 Startup command group to action 15 7 Window maximized 15 9 Window minimized 15 9 Workspace fills screen 15 9 Registry Entries Command summary 15 2 ResetTerminal 6 7 S Save Session 6 5 6 10 SCO Console Emulation Host command summary C 29 Virtual key names A 6 Scrolling Horizontally DEC VT emulations 7 5 Serial Connection Settings 2 19 Session Opening new 6 9 Save 6 10 Saveas 6 10 Session Configuration DEC VT emulations 7 1 DG 410 412 emulation 8 1 HP 700 92 96 emulation 9 1 IBM 3151 emulation 12 1 IBM 3270 emulation 10 1 IBM 5250 emulation 11 1 TA6530 emulation 13 1 Wyseemulations 14 1 SetTabs 6 56 Settings Menu 6 15 Setup Menus Attributes 6 63 Auxport settings 6 49 Block Transmission 6 59 Button Tools 6 76 Closing 6 2 Codes in entries 6 4 Defaultsettings 6 4 Define Keyboard Macros 3 1 Displaying 6 1 Edit Menu 6 14 Emulation settings 6 17 File menu 6 7 HP 700 92 96 settings 6 20 IBM 3151 settin
121. about the state of the emulation or application The Extended status line displays additional editing status messages Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details Block End Factory default US CR This option applies to all emulations and specifies the ASCII characters used to indicate the end of a line and a block when a block of data is sent to the host When set to US CR the line terminator is a US character and the block terminator is a CR character When set to CRLF ETX the line terminators are the CR and LF characters and the block terminator is an ETX character Attribute Type Factory default Page The setting of this option determines whether display attributes are active to the end of the line or the end of the page The Character setting only applies to the WY 60 emulation and causes attributes to only apply to characters written to the screen The WY 50 ADDS A2 and HZ 1500 emulations only support the Page setting Code Page Factory default PC Multinational 437 This option determines the set of characters that form the second half of the multinational character set when in multinational mode as set by the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box 6 31 Setup Menus ASCII Font Factory default WY ASCII This option determines whether the Wyse ASCII or PC standard character set is used as the first half of the multinational character set when in multinational mode as set by th
122. acter ESCQ Delete line ESCO Erase to end of field line ESCI Erase to end of page ESCJ Erase input ESCK Insert character ESC P character Insert line ESCN GENERAL OPERATION Bell BEL Cancel ESCS or CAN Disable write Null ESC Enable write Null ESC Line turnaround character if selected ETX CR EOT or DC3 C 27 Host Command Summary Read status Enter transparent mode control characters displayed Exit transparent mode Mandatory disconnect Begin pass through data stream End pass through data stream Restart transmission pacing Stop transmission pacing Begin outbound trace End outbound trace Reset to initial state Reset keyboard lock amp keep MDT bit Read control 1 Read control 2 Read control 3 Read control 4 Read control 5 Read control 6 Read control 7 Read model Read model extended Read terminal ID Read all Read line send line Read message send message Read page send page Write send mark Set control 1 Set control 2 Set control 3 Set control 4 Set control 5 Set control 6 Set control 7 KEYBOARD ESC 6 DLE STX DLE ETX DLE EOT DLE DC2 DLE DC4 DC1 XON DC3 XOFF ESC SP ESC SP ESC SPS ESC S ESC SP7 ESC 7 ESC 7 ESC 7 ESC 7 ESC 7 ESC amp 7 ESC SP 6 ESC 6 ESC 6 ESC 8 ESC 8 ESC SP 8 ESC 8 ESCE ESC SP 9 mode1 mode2 op ESC 9 mode1 mode2 op ESC 9 mode1 mode2 op ESC 9 mode operation ESC 9 m1 m2
123. acter Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational This table forms the first half of the Multinational character set the second half of which may be the DEC Additional or one of the ISO Latin Additional sets as determined by the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box B 2 Character Sets NATIONAL REPLACEMENT CHARACTERS BINARY BIT ch sch OO Och OCH OCTAL A o 140 173 DECIMAL wo a 96 123 HEXADECIMAL N Wa British 60 7B _ et ke gt 2 Canadian A m m m OD Danish Norwegian gt Dutch Finnish French Belgian German Italian Portuguese Spanish M HM EIME MEE EIM Swedish Swiss French Swiss German This table shows the characters that replace certain ASCH characters when the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to National The national character set consists of the ASCII set with the changed characters listed on the line for the selected keyboard nationality B 3 Character Sets DEC ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET Multinational 8 Bit O OINI ODO oO AIT OIN o 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is one of three possibl
124. acters will be left untouched When unselected both protected and unprotected characters can be erased 6 57 Setup Menus Attributes Cleared Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines the effect of an erase command on character attributes When selected both attributes and characters will be cleared from display memory when an erase command is issued When this option is unselected all video attributes currently used will remain in display memory when an erase command is issued This will result in new characters being displayed with the video attributes associated with their positions on the display Protect From Host Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether or not the host can overwrite protected characters 6 58 Setup Menus Block Transmission Block Transmission IT Send Unprotected Only V Send Font Information I Send Only Selected Areas IV Send Record Separators I Send all Selected Areas I Send Spaces Compressed T Line Transmission On Send Partial Page MPF Key Effect None C Breakthrough Ae TX Prefix Ae TX Suffix Send Key Effect Transmit Protocol Immediate Deferred C Ansi C T 131 End of Line Characters M End of Block Characters Cancel This dialog box is displayed by selecting Block Transmission in the Settings menu The options in this dialog box only apply to the block mode functio
125. ady 1 2 3 4 Field 1 rrr ccc indicates the current row and column position of the cursor Field 2 INSERT indicates that Insert mode is active when the Insert key is pressed or when the Insert Character command is received Note that the message will not be displayed if the Insert Character option is not set to Mode Insert mode is exited by pressing the Insert or Reset key Field 3 Indicates the current operating mode In BLOCK mode keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host In CHAR mode keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the display In ECHO mode keyboard entered data is sent only to the host The host is then responsible for returning the data to the display Field 4 HOLD SCREEN indicates that the Hold Screen key has been pressed to suspend screen update Press Hold Screen again to enable screen up date INVALID KEY appears when you press an invalid key KEYS LOCKED appears when the keyboard is locked The keys will be unlocked when the Keyboard Unlock command is received or when the Cancel key is pressed NUMERIC indicates the cursor is located in an unprotected numeric field PRINTING indicates that data is being sent to the printer 12 3 IBM 3151 Emulation SENDING indicates that data is being sent to the host WRONG PLACE appears when you press an invalid key in a protected field or field attri
126. al off UnisysT27 off Wyse off These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator They will disable the Tools menu Disable Scroll Bar ScrollBar off SB on Registry Entry Command Line Default Setting These commands will remove the scroll bar from the window 15 15 Initialization Commands Soft Buttons Displayed Registry Entry ButtonLevels 0 4 Command Line BLO 4 Default Setting 1 These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator A set of soft buttons is displayed at the bottom of the emulatoor window by default There are four soft button levels Level 1 is displayed by default Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 buttons You can display all four levels 48 buttons at the same time if required All levels are accessible even if not all are displayed levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level button You can specify how many soft button levels are actually displayed by using this registry entry or command line option All four levels can be displayed by specifying 4 Specifying 0 will cause no soft buttons to be displayed Disable Status Bar amp DEC Status Line Registry Entry StatusLine off Command Line V Default Setting on These commands will remove the status bar and DEC VT Status line at the bottom of the window Disable
127. andard alphabetic numeric and symbolic characters and control codes The second 8 bit table differs between the three sets and provides various special and multinational characters and additional control codes as shown in the Character Sets appendix The Ansi setting will use the PC ANSI character set specified by the Ansi Code Page option The ANSI BBS emulation will use this character set by default Ansi Code Page Factory default 437 This option specifies the character set used for display when the Preferred Char Set option is set to Ansi Note that selecting the ANSI BBS emulation will automatically set the preferred font to Ansi The character set mappings code pages supported are 437 for normal usage default and 850 858 or 1250 for multinational usage Each set consists of two tables of characters The first table is the standard ASCII character set The second table contains special characters which differ between the sets Refer to the Character Sets appendix for details Save Screen Before Clearing Factory default Unselected This applies to all DEC VT emulations except VT340 and VT420 It determines the effect of a clear screen command received from the host When unselected the contents of the current page will be cleared When selected the contents of the current page will be saved and the display will scroll to the next page Save Scrolled Lines Factory default Unselected If a scroll region is set select
128. ata from display memory to the printer The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the previous section entitled Device Control Record Mode F2 This is used to copy data received from the host to the printer and or display depending on the setting of the To Ext Dev and To Display labels in the Device Control menu Note This function does not take effect when the emulation is in Local mode In Remote mode received data is sent directly to the selected device s The keyboard will be disabled when Record mode is activated except for the F2 key which is used to exit the mode Log Bottom F3 When the cursor moves to the next line as a result of an explicit line feed or end of line wraparound the line of data which the cursor has just moved from will be sent to the printer when this function is activated This enables you to create a hardcopy of all the lines in the order in which they were entered via the keyboard or received from the host Note Both the emulation and the host must be using the ENQ ACK or Xon Xoff handshakes or a baud rate that is no higher than the rate supported by the printer 9 10 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Log Bottom remains activated until either this button or F3 is pressed again Log Top is activated a reset is performed or the emulation is exited Log Top F4 When the display memory becomes full and more data is received from the host or keyboard lines of data from the
129. ate screen buffer No Xwindows capabilities Bull BQ3107 7107 Specification Reference manual Bull Questar 310 Terminal BQ 3107 82 A2 78ST REVO February 1990 Limitations Remote and Line printing are not supported Product Specification Data General D200 D410 Specification Dasher D410 Display Terminals User s Manual 014 000761 02 December 1983 Digital VT Emulation Specification Digital VT 420 Programmer s Manual EK VT420 RM 001 Limitations The DEC Multisession and SSU protocols are not implemented HP 700 92 Emulation Specification HP 2392A Reference Guide 02394 90001 April 1984 IBM 3270 Emulation Specification 3270 Information Display System Data Stream Programmer s Reference GA23 0059 07 Limitations No Double byte printing D 3 Product Specification IBM 5250 Emulation Specification 5494 Remote Control Unit Functions Reference Release 2 0 SC30 3533 02 Limitations No text assist in Right to Left writing mode No double byte printing The 3812 1 Non Host Print Transform Non HPT print protocol is not supported No Calculator Hex key No Password encryption No Auxillary port support No Control Unit customisation The specification is also defined by the 5250 Device Capabilities report Bytes 0 thru 5 which are 0x7f 0x11 0x4e 0x00 0x03 0x80 for Display Sessions IBM 3151 Native Emulation Model 11 am
130. ates that the aux port is ready for bidirectional output In Use indicates that the aux port is currently busy Hotspots A hotspot facility is provided which enables you to invoke a function by clicking on a keyword displayed on the screen For example an application may display information relating to keys you can press to perform a particular function Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard you could invoke the function by holding down the Control key and clicking the mouse pointer on the key name on the display assuming default mouse configuration Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes A set of default keywords is provided for each mode These keywords relate to key functions specific to the emulation For example in VT500 mode you can tap on the word Help displayed on the screen and the emulator will execute the function associated with the Help key You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by assigning the Show Hotspots function to a key mouse button combination using the Mouse Button Actions dialog box refer to the Mouse Functions chapter for details Holding down the relevant key and left mouse button will cause all colour attributes to be temporarily removed from the display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red background Releasing the key and left mouse button will return the display to its original state 2 30 Keyboard Configuration Keyboard Configur
131. atibility with software designed to drive the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminals respectively The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals The HZ 1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hazeltine 1500 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals The TVI 910 TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910 920 and 925 terminals respec tively as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals 14 1 Wyse Emulations 5 Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate
132. ation This chapter describes how to configure the keyboard define key functions and compose special characters Keyboard Mapping The keyboard is mapped as close as possible to the terminal being emulated An Illustration showing the mapping of key functions on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT style keyboard layout is shown in each terminal emulation chapter Special key functions supported by each terminal emulation can be mapped to keys using the predefined macros listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box as described in the next section Defining Key Functions You can redefine the function of keys on the keyboard using the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box which is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings menu Define Keyboard Macros Create New Macro Current Macro Definitions Program Key With T Local Add gt Predefined Macros Apply VK CONTROL k Defined Macro Key Code Lid lt Remove Remove All canei Keyboard Configuration This enables you to redefine the function of most of the keys on your keyboard including the key combinations listed below Key Shift Key Control Key Control Shift Key Alt Key Alt Shift Key Alt Control Key Alt Control Shift Key Each definition may contain a string of up to 127 characters The combined total of all the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127 charac
133. ation on this emulation The IBM 3270 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the IBM 3270 terminal Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode NVT mode for short The setting of the IBM 3270 Model option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes are supported Refer to the JBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details The IBM 5250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive IBM 5250 type alphanumeric terminals This emulation can be used for connection to an IBM AS 400 System 36 or System 38 Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode NVT mode for short Refer to the IBM 5250 Emulation chapter for details SCO Console is an emulation of the SCO UNIX box The TA6530 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Tandem 6530 terminal This emulation is described in the TA6530 Emulation chapter The TVI 910 TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910 920 and 925 terminals respectively as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The TVI 950 and TVI 955 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Tele Video 950 and 955 terminals respectively The VT52 and VT100 em
134. ator will reply by sending an ACK acknowledge code when it has Note that this form of handshaking has the lowest priority after hardware and XON XOFF handshaking EscXfer Factory default Unselected This option determines whether escape sequences relating to the display are sent when the display memory is transferred to the printer When unselected escape sequences relating to the display are not sent to the printer When selected each line transferred to the printer will begin with an escape sequence to select the primary character set and stop any character enhancements When escape sequences relating to the display are encountered within the data for example to change the character set they will be sent to the printer Destructive Backspace Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether or not pressing the Backspace key will cause characters to be deleted CR CR NULL Factory default Unselected This option must only be selected if you are going to use the QEDIT application It overcomes a bug within QEDIT that ignores the LF character if the terminal transmits 6 22 Setup Menus CR LF Inserting a NULL after the CR character cures the problem Display Form Feeds Factory default Selected When selected this will cause form feeds to be represented on the display as fr characters Ignore Form Feeds Factory default Unselected When the emulator receives a form feed command from
135. ay omit the VK_ and VT_ etc parts of the virtual key name To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with plus sign characters and ending with the gt character For example to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the key definition box lt ALT F4 gt To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the key definition box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Keyboard Configuration Compose Character Sequences Compose character sequences can be used to generate codes for characters not shown on your keyboard The characters that can be composed depend on the setting of the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box When Character Set Mode is is set to
136. below the menu bar This displays a series of buttons which provide a quick way of actioning commands or displaying setup dialog boxes when clicked EE You can redefine all the buttons and add or remove buttons from the toolbar using the Button Tools dialog box Refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar for a complete description of all the default buttons and how to redefine the toolbar The Soft Buttons A set of soft buttons can be displayed along the bottom of the emulator window These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked Level 1 There are four soft button levels Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons You can display all four levels at the same time if required All levels are accessible even if not all are displayed levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level button The soft buttons are programmed using the Soft Buttons dialog box which is displayed by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Soft Buttons The setting of the Visible Levels option determines how many soft button levels are displayed Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for information on programming the buttons The Status Bar Along the bottom of the display is a status bar which shows the status of various operations and enables you to switch between modes The information displayed in the status bar depends on the cur
137. between each field when this option is selected Send Spaces Compressed Factory default Unselected This option determines how spaces and empty character fields within a block of data are sent to the host When unselected a space character will be sent for each empty character position When selected a record separator code RS will be sent in place of empty character positions The last field on a line will contain end of line characters as specified by the End of Line Characters option 6 60 Setup Menus Send Partial Page Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether a partial page or data in the scrolling region is sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed and the Line Transmission On option is unselected When selected this option will enable a partial page to be sent to the host The format of the partial page is determined by the setting of the Transmit Protocol option When unselected the contents of the scrolling region will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed PF Key Effect Factory default None This option determines how unshifted PF keys work in Local Editing mode When set to None the unshifted function of PF keys will be disabled When set to Breakthrough unshifted PF keys will function immediately when pressed if they have been assigned functions by application software When set to As TX Prefix the function of unshifted PF keys will be sent to the host
138. ble menu bar none MB Disable menu bar amp pop ups none MB1 Disable File menu FileMenu off MF Disable Factory item Factory off none Disable Reset item Reset off none Disable New Connection item NewConnection off none Disable OpenSession item OpenSession off none Disable CloseSession item CloseSession off none Disable Save Session item SaveSession off none Disable Save Session As item SaveSessionAs off none Disable Start up Options item StartupOptions off none Disable File Transfer item FileTransfer off none Disable FTP item FTP off none Disable Print Setup item PrintSetup off none Disable Print Screen item PrintScreen off none Disable Print Buffer item Print Buffer off none Disable Auto Print item AutoPrint off none Disable Cancel Print item CancelPrint off none Disable Eject Page item EjectPage off none Disable Exit item Exit off none Disable Edit menu EditMenu off MD Disable Clipboard Text item ClipboardText off none Disable Clipboard Graphics item ClipboardGraphics off none Disable Copy item Copy off none Disable Paste item Paste off none Disable Select All item SelectAll off none Disable Clear Buffer item ClearBuffer off none Disable Settings menu SettingsMenu off MS Disable Attributes item Attributes off none Disable Block Transmission item BlockTransmission off none Disable BQ3107 item BQ3107 off none Disable Em
139. bute character position It is also displayed when you try to insert a character or line in a screen already full when the Forcing Insert option is set to Off If two or more messages are sent to a particular field then the message with the highest priority will be displayed Messages in field 4 are displayed in the following order HOLD SCREEN SENDING PRINTING KEYS LOCKED INVALID KEY WRONG PLACE NUMERIC Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where IBM 3151 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 12 4 Eat DEF F RESET ESC FA Alt F1 RESET PRMSG BREAK SMSG Send Message Seed F11 F12 J enner UNI Horo SLINE Send Line F10 PR MSG Print Message PSCR Print Screen ERINP Erase Input RETURN DELETE ER EOF Control key usage s usa Normal key usage SLINE All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps Functions in brackets are generated when the keys are shifted 1noAe7 pseoghey Ly p vueyug uo enwg LGL WEI IBM 3151 Emulation Defining Function Keys The keys mapped as F1 through
140. by 2 seconds by inserting Delay 2s indicated by lt D gt or 0 255 seconds by inserting Pause 0 255 indicated by lt P gt When you have finished specifying the response to a particular prompt click the Add button to add the definition to the Script window on the right The script will perform the actions in the order displayed in the Script window To change the order of the script lines use the up and down arrow buttons to the right of the Script window Repeat this procedure for each prompt as required If you want to edit one of the script lines select the line in the Script window then click Remove to send it to the edit boxes on the left Make the change s then click Add to send it back to the script Note that this will now be the last line of the script When the Script window contains all the required responses to the relevant prompts in the correct order click Finish 2 22 Getting Started Printer Port Settings The Printer Port Settings dialog box enables you to direct print data to a printer handled by the Print Manager a specific port or a network printer TE Client Connection Wizard Printer Port Settings Printer Port Parallel Cable on LPT1 sl IT Use Network Printer LPR IT FormFeed Terminator Auto Line Feed Output Character Set fo Seconds Close Delay 150 Latin 1 sl lt Back Cancel Direct Print Data To The Print Manager The Current System Printer Driver box disp
141. ceptable device name it is possible that the two sessions will access the counter simultaneously and not all possible names will be tried by each session This should not cause a problem unless the separate sessions use different modulo values for example session one device name TEST d4 and session two device name ANOTHER d100 or are connecting to different hosts Note There are separate counters for the IBM 3270 and IBM 5250 emulations User Password Library Menu These options enable you to specify the initial entries required on the standard startup screen so that it can be bypassed Each entry can be a maximum of ten characters Program This enables you to specify the name of the initial program to run The entry can be a maximum of ten characters 2 15 Getting Started 5250 Printer Options Printer Environment Device Name IGE Feature Dont Repot Transform Fes z Mfg Type and Model HP MSGO Name MSGQ Library KE Font fi1 Formfeed Dont Repot e Paper Source 1 A4 e Paper Some Zb d Envelope Hopper bur x ASCII 899 Support DontRepot zl WSCST Name WSCST Libray OK Cancel This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 5250 Options button in the TCP IP Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN5250 is not suppressed and the IBM 5250 Model is set to 3812 1 a printer Device Name Specifies the name of the printer device IGC Feature This is always set
142. ck Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next 13 1 TA6530 Emulation The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button The Tandem 6530 emulation is configured using the TA6530 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the TA6530 terminal emulati
143. cross a network as a single packet The Predefined Macros box enables you to select from a list of standard functions associated with the current terminal emulation Clicking the arrow button will display a list box in which the names of valid key functions called virtual key names are shown The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and associated virtual key names for each terminal emulation A key definition may be actioned locally or transmitted to the host when the key or key combination is pressed This is determined by the setting of the Local check box When unchecked the definition will be transmitted to the host The Current Macro Definitions box displays the key and key combinations that are currently defined You can remove the selected definition or delete all the definitions by clicking the relevant Remove button 6 68 Setup Menus Defining A Key Or Key Combination 1 Click in the Program Key box then press the key or key combination to define The current definition will be displayed 2 Click in the With box then enter the new definition or make a selection from the list of Predefined Macros then click Apply 3 Check the Local check box to make the key definition action locally or uncheck it to transmit the definition to the host when the key or key combination is pressed 4 Click the Add button to accept the definition The new definition will be added to the Current Macro Definitions list
144. cted area ESC V GENERAL OPERATION Cancel current ESC sequence amp display error CAN Local echo mode on ESC 121 Local echo mode off ESC 12h Reset features in ESC h commands ESC 1 Reset terminal emulation ESC c Restore saved features ESC 8 Save features char set attrib s cursor origin ESC7 Select VT52 mode ESC 21 Select VT100 mode from VT320 mode ESC 61 p Select VT500 7 bit mode ESC 62 1 p Select VT500 8 bit mode ESC 62 p Select VT500 8 bit mode can be 0 or 2 ESC 62 p Select Wyse 60 mode ESC 42h Set features in ESC h commands ESC h Soft reset ESC p Sound audible tone BEL Transmit rate limited to 150 180 cps ESC 73h Transmit rate unlimited ESC 731 C 4 Host Command Summary KEYBOARD Backspace key performs backspace only ESC 67h Backspace key performs delete ESC 671 Data processing keys mode ESC 68h Disable key autorepeat ESC 81 Disable keyboard ESC Disable keyboard input ESC 2h Enable key autorepeat ESC 8h Enable keyboard ESC b Enable keyboard input ESC 21 Select cursor key application mode ESC 1h Select cursor key normal mode ESC 11 Select keypad application mode ESC Select keypad numeric mode ESC gt Typewriter keys mode ESC 681 LOCAL EDITING Data block for transmission is cursor line ESC 11h Data block for transmission is page ESC 111 Disable transmission of protected areas ESC 11 Edit key changes mode immediatel
145. ctory default Cross A rule can be displayed across the emulation workspace at the cursor position by pressing the keys Alt Page Down which toggles it on and off The setting of this option determines whether it is displayed as a horizontal rule vertical rule or both Follows Cursor Factory default Unselected When the rule is displayed in the emulation workspace the setting of this option determines whether or not the rule follows the cursor when it moves Notice Board Setup This will display the Notice Board Setup dialog box as described in the next section Unlock Delay Factory default 0 This option is available when the IBM 3270 Model is not set to a printer When the keyboard is unlocked by the host this specifies a delay in milliseconds before characters are sent Print Bypass Character This option is available when the IBM 3270 Model option is set to a printer The Start Seq box enables you to enter the character or sequence of characters that initiate a print bypass The end sequence that terminates the print bypass can be specified either by entering the actual characters in the End Seq box when Specify End Sequence is selected or by specifying the number of characters that make up the end sequence in the End Length box when End on Non Hex is selected If no End Seq is entered the bypass is assumed to be for a single pair of characters only If an End Seq is specified characters in the data stream between the star
146. current line CR Cursor to start of next line US Home cursor ESC or RS Line lock mode on ESCH Line lock mode off ESC I Move cursor up scroll ESC j Read 80 column window page amp cursor address ESC Read 80 column page number amp cursor address ESC w Read cursor address in current 80 column page ESC Read cursor address in current 80 132 column page ESC b Redefine screen as one window amp clear pages ESC x 0 Set cursor display features ESC cursor Set tab stop ESC 1 Tabulate cursor ESCi Tab cursor HT Tab cursor backward ESCI Tabs are not initialized ESCe Tabs are initialized ESCe DISPLAY 80 column display ESC 132 column display ESC 80 132 change clears screen on ESC e 80 132 change clears screen off ESCe Activate lower window ESC Activate other window display previous page ESCJ Activate other window display next page ESCK Activate upper window ESC Autopage mode off ESC d Autopage on ESC d Autoscrolling mode on ESC 0 Autoscrolling mode off ESCN Display 24 data lines ESC et Display 25 data lines ESCe Display 42 data lines ESC e Display 43 data lines ESCe Display graphics character ESC H key Display next page ESC wC Display previous page ESC wB Display specific page ESC w page Divide memory into pages ESC w length Economy 80 column mode on ESCeG Economy 80 column mode off ESCeF Horizontal split higher ESCxR Horizontal split lower ESC x P Program label line ESC f Protect mode on ESC amp Protect mo
147. cursor into the relevant field and type in the new definition which can consist of a maximum of 16 characters eight characters per field 9 14 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Key String Definition The second line of each f key definition contains the character string that is to be displayed executed and or transmitted to the host when the key or button is pressed The string may contain alphanumeric characters control characters and explicit escape sequence characters entered when Display Functions mode is enabled by pressing F7 or the Display Functns button The default f key string begins with the characters EC which represent the escape code that is used to begin each escape sequence The EC characters are displayed in the key definition line by pressing the Esc key or the keys Ctrl together when Display Functions mode is enabled Note that you must enter the entire escape sequence before disabling Display Functions mode by pressing F7 again When Display Functions is enabled the Return key may be used to insert carriage return codes CR in the string If Auto LF mode is selected in the Mode Selection function menu Return will generate a line feed LF code as well as carriage return To change an f key button string definition use the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the cursor onto the second line the line following LABEL definition for that key button and type in the new definition which can consist of a maximum of 80 cha
148. de Normal UL BD FL BD UL Screen FL BD IV UL BD Bold BD FL UL IV FL BD Underline UL IV FL IV FL UL Flashing FL IV BD IV FL BD UL Inverse IV IV UL When running the IBM 5250 emulation the list of character attributes is extended to include the column separator CS attribute When running the IBM 3270 emulation the list box will allow selection of the following items Unprotected Normal Unprotected Bold Protected Normal Protected Bold Status BG Attribute The list of attribute options allow you to enable or disable the actual display of attributes associated with the selected screen element Note that the Column Sep CS option is only applicable to the IBM 5250 emulation and the Hidden option is only applicable to the Wyse 60 emulation Use Italic with Intensity Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause any characters that have the intensity bold attribute to be italicized 6 64 Setup Menus Use Bold Font Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause all characters to be displayed using a bold font Use Colours When selected the currently selected screen element will be displayed in the colours highlighted in the Foreground and Background colour palettes For default display deselect this option Swap Black White Factory default Unselected When selected anything that has the white attribute will be displayed as black and vice versa Inverse Colours Fac
149. de enabled ESCk Duplex editing key mode enabled ESC1 Load the margin bell column ETB Margin bell on ESC 4h Margin bell off ESC 41 Sound bell BEL LOADING amp SENDING MESSAGES Send terminal s identification ESCM Program the answerback message ESC lt text gt EM Send the answerback message ENQ Display user message 1 on bottom screen line ESC g Display status line on bottom screen line ESCh Select contents of top information line ESC 4 v Select contents of bottom information line ESC 5 v 0 Blank 2 User message 1 1 Status line 3 User message 2 Load text into user message 1 ESC f lt text gt CR Load text into a user message ESC _ m e lt text gt CR C 39 Host Command Summary User Message Effect m 0 _ Status line message field e 0 Clears message before loading 1 User message 1 1 Writes over existing message 2 User message 2 Send contents of information line ESC Z 0 User message 1 1 Status line 2 User message 2 PRINTING Buffered copy print mode on ESC Buffered copy print mode off ESCA Buffered transparent print mode on ESC Buffered transparent print mode off ESC a Buffered bidirectional print mode on DC2 Buffered bidirectional print mode off DC4 Print unprotected formatted page ESCP Print all unformatted page ESCL Page print ESC 0 i 0 Formatted all 4 Unformatted all 1 Formatted unprotected 5 Unformatted unprotected Define page print terminator ESC p SCREEN MEMORY Define
150. de is selected the function keys and certain editing keys will send application codes when pressed regardless of whether or not the keys have been redefined When this option is not selected the keys will send their programmed definitions CR CR NULL Factory default Selected This option allows you to disable the NULL being automatically sent on CR 6 34 Setup Menus TA6530 Settings Power On Mode Packet Block for d IV Status Border I Return Function IV Telserv Format IV Bell On Bell Column fo e This dialog box is displayed by selecting TA 6530 in the Settings menu Power On Mode Factory default Conversational This option determines the operating mode that is in effect when the TA6530 emulation is entered Note Changing the current setting will not take effect until you re load the emulation so you will need to save the new setting before exiting the emulation Conversational and Block modes are normally used for applications running on a NonStop host system and ANSI mode for applications running on an LXN host system Save the new setting before exiting the emulation by selecting Save Session in the File menu Packet Block Factory default OFF This option specifies whether you want to use packet blocking for X 25 communica tions line support and if so the size of the packet block The size may be set to any of the listed 128 byte increments or by setting this option to OFF the default si
151. de off ESC Redefine screen as one window ESC x Redefine screen as one window amp clear pages ESC x0 C 44 Host Command Summary Restore normal display Reverse display Roll window up in page Roll window down in page Split screen Split screen two pages only Split screen amp clear pages Split screen amp clear pages 2 pages only ESC 0 ESC 1 ESCwE ESCwF ESC x C line ESC x A line ESC x 3 line ESC x 1 line Status line format a extended b standard ESC Status line message ESC F message CR Status line not displayed ESC c Turn display off ESC 8 Turn display on ESC 9 EDITING Begin send at top of page ESC d Begin send at top of screen ESC d amp Delete cursor character ESC W Delete cursor column ESCcj Delete cursor line ESCR Insert column of nulls ESC c M Insert line of spaces ESCE Insert mode on replace mode off ESC q Insert mode off replace mode on ESC r Insert space character ESC Q Page edit mode on Wyse 60 mode ESC e Page edit mode off Wyse 60 mode ESC e Write protect mode off ESC Write protect mode on ESC GENERAL OPERATION Answerback mode off ESC e SP Answerback mode on ESCe Graphics mode on ESC H CTRL B Graphics mode off ESC H CTRL C Received CR mode off ESC ei Received CR mode on ESCe5 Run script in Wyse and TVI ADDS HZ enhanced modes Set MODEM port receive handshake Set MODEM port transmit handshake HOST COMMUNICATIONS ESC c s filena
152. deo Origin normal Autowrap on off Autorept on off CNM CR NL HFT Reset mode ANSI specified modes Reset mode other private modes amp XTERM private modes Restore mode other private modes amp XTERM private modes Save mode other private modes amp XTERM private modes Ignore everything between ESC P and ESC ESC 2 h 1 3 5 6 H 8 21 ESG ns RsCTik 2 ESC 3 3 5 ESC 5 3 s AIXTerm works as normal after ESC ESC P ESC KEYBOARD amp MOUSE Select numeric keypad application mode VT100 ESC Select numeric keypad normal mode VT100 ESC gt Disable manual input HFT ESC Enable manual input HFT ESC b REPORTS Device status report is one of the following ESC n Response from VT100 ready 0 Command from host please report status 5 Command from host report active position 6 Keyboard status information ESC p PF key report HFT ESC q Report cursor position ESC 1 cR Report terminal identity host to VT100 ESC c Report terminal identity host to VT100 ESC 0c Terminal response VT 100 to host ESC 1 2c C 18 Host Command Summary DG 410 412 Emulation DG Mode In the following command sequences lt n gt represents a 1 byte argument lt nn gt represents a 2 byte argument and lt nnn gt represents a 3 byte argument Bytes are entered as ASCII characters Only the four least significant bits are used in each byte Commands t
153. dows The Ansi BBS emulation is a derivative of the ANSI device driver ANSI SYS supplied with all DOS based PCs and which provides the screen management for the DOS console screen PC based UNIX systems and Bulletin Board Systems BBS often rely on the ANSI emulation when being accessed by a PC In ANSI BBS mode the screen size is adjusted to 25 lines and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is automatically set to Ansi The setting of the Ansi Code Page option in this dialog box determines the characters available in the ANSI BBS set The AT 386 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the AT amp T AT 386 terminal The DG 410 412 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Data General D410 and D412 terminals Refer to the DG 410 412 Emulation chapter for details 6 17 Setup Menus The HP 700 92 96 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett Packard 700 92 2392A 2622A 70094 and 70096 terminals This emulation is described in detail in the HP 700 92 96 Emulation chapter The HZ1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hazeltine 1500 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The IBM 3151 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the IBM 3151 terminal Refer to the JBM 3151 Emulation chapter for inform
154. e All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps ROLL D Functions in square brackets are generated when used with Ctrl Normal key usage 1noAe7 psreoghey Ly p vueyua uonemnwg OS S Wal IBM 5250 Emulation Text Display Options Display Right to Left The contents of the screen can be displayed in reverse i e as a right to left mirror image by pressing the keys Shift Backspace This is a toggle function so pressing the keys again will revert to normal left to right display An arrow will be displayed on the status line to indicate normal right arrow or mirror left arrow display Typing Direction The direction in which characters are displayed on the screen when typed can be toggled between normal left to right and right to left by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad The characters gt or lt will be displayed on the status line to indicate the current typing direction Selecting the Symbol Swap option in the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box will cause symbols such as round or angle brackets to be displayed the correct way round when typing right to left Close Key If text has been typed using both typing direction modes in the same line or field you can force the right hand text to join the left hand text by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad Push Mode Push mode allows you to edit text whose direction is opposite the screen orientation In this mode the cursor or
155. e Required Tab Symbols Command Virtual Key Name AS_FIELDPLUS AS_GO_EOL AS_HELP AS_HOME AS_INSERT AS_MONO AS_NEWLINE AS_PAL AS_PA3 AS_PAUSE AS_PLAY AS_PRINTLOCAL AS_PRINT AS_PUSH AS_QUIT AS_RECORD AS_RESET AS_ROLLDOWN AS_ROLLUP AS_RULE AS_SYSREQ AS_TAB AS_TEST Virtual Key Name AS_WP_TOP_PAGE AS_WP_END_PAGE AS_WP_NEW_PAGE AS_WP_RETURN AS_WP_STOP_CODE AS_WP_FIND_STOP AS WP RPOD PAGE AS_WP_REQD_ SPACE AS_WP_REQD_TAB AS_WP_SYMBOLS A 5 Virtual Key Names SCO Console Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Backspace SC_BACKSPACE Fl F12 SC_F1 SC_F21 Cursor Down SC_DOWN F1 F12 Shift SC_S_F1 SC_S_F12 Cursor Left SC_LEFT F1 F12 Ctrl SC_C_F1 SC_C_F12 Cursor Right SC_RIGHT Fl F12 Ctrl Shift SC_CS_F1 SC_CS_F12 Cursor Up SC_UP Home SC_HOME Delete SC_DELETE Insert SC_INSERT Delete Shift SC_S_DELETE Page Down SC_PAGEDOWN Delete Ctrl Shift SC_CS_DELETE Page Down Shift SC_S_PAGEDOWN End SC_END Page Up SC_PAGEUP End Shift SC_S_END Return SC_RETURN Enter SC_ENTER Tab SC_TAB Escape SC_ESCAPE Tab Shift SC_S_TAB TA6530 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Backspace TA_BACKSPACE Keypad Comma TA_PADCOMMA Back Tab TA_BACKTAB Keypad Decimal TA_PADDECIMAL Break TA_BREAK Keypad Enter TA_ENTER Character Delete TA_CHARDEL Keypad Minus TA_PADMINUS Character Insert TA_CHARINS Line Delete TA_LINEDEL Curso
156. e Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box WPRT Attribute Factory default Dim This option applies to all emulations and enables you to specify the appearance of write protected characters on the display They can be displayed in reverse video dimmed or blinking The WY 50 and WY 60 emulations also support the underline and invisible attributes Multiple Page Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 WY 60 and all the TVI emulations It determines whether or not more than one page of display memory can be accessed When selected all pages will be accessible See also the Auto Page option Note that the TVI emulations support two pages of 24 lines each when this and the Auto Page options are selected regardless of the Lines and Page Size settings 80 132 Clears Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and determines whether or not data is cleared from the display when the number of columns is changed The screen is always cleared when the number of columns is changed in the other emulations Economy 80 Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and enables 80 column display with more lines of display memory Auto Scroll Factory default Selected This option applies to all emulations and determines what happens when the cursor is moved beyond the last line of the current page When selected the dis
157. e Line Cross zl FP Eollows Cursor Notice Board Options Unlock Delay jo Font Courier New SBCS APL2 F Allow CodePage 285 z CodePage 310 0 CharSet e97 CharSet be 3 CCSID 285 CESID J311 Cancel Default This dialog box is displayed by selecting IBM 3270 in the Settings menu IBM 3270 Model Factory default 3278 2 E This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported TN3287 printing is supported by selecting 3287 1 One of four display sizes can be selected 3278 9 2 24 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 3 32 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 4 43 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 5 27 rows by 132 columns 3278 settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended attributes these are supported by the 3279 as standard 3270 Field Attributes Extended Highlighting Foreground Colour Query Reply Inbound Structured Fields 6 37 Setup Menus Numeral Swap Factory default Unselected When using a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard this will cause all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin mode Symbol Swap Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause symbols such as brackets to be displayed the correct way round when typing in right to left mode Rule Line Fa
158. e down ESCF Move cursor home up ESCH or ESCh Move cursor one column left ESCD Move cursor one column right ESCC Move cursor one line down ESCB Move cursor one line up ESCA Move cursor to left margin ESCG Move cursor to next tab stop ESC I uppercase i Move cursor to previous tab stop ESCi Screen relative addressing column ESC amp a C Screen relative addressing column line ESC amp a cc lY Screen relative addressing line ESC amp a Y Screen relative addressing line column ESC amp a ly cC Set tab stop at current cursor position ESC 1 C 22 Host Command Summary DISPLAY 80 column display 132 column display Clear all margins Display next page Display previous page Format mode off Format mode on Jump scroll enabled Memory lock disabled Memory lock enabled Scroll down one line Scroll up one line Select invisible display Select visible display Set left margin Set right margin Smooth scroll enabled Define colour pair ESC amp w6f80X ESC amp w 6f 132 X ESC 9 ESC U ESC V ESC X ESC W ESC amp kO ESC m ESC1 ESC T ESCS ESC amp w 13 F ESC amp w 12 F ESC 4 ESC5 ESC amp k1 ESC amp v parameters parameters can be one or more of the following lt 0 1 gt m lt decimal gt a lt decimal gt b lt decimal gt c lt decimal gt x lt decimal gt y lt decimal gt z lt 0 7 gt i lt 0 7 gt s lt 0 7 gt RGB 0 or HSL 1 colour specification method Red or Hue c
159. e feed command is automatically appended to every carriage return command generated from the keyboard The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu Configuration Selection This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key which is equivalent to the HP 700 92 96 User System key These functions enable you to access three other sets of function labels Device Control F1 Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Control function labels to be displayed The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the following section entitled Device Control Margins Tabs Col F2 Clicking this button or pressing F2 will cause the Margins Tabs Col function labels to be displayed The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the section entitled Margins Tabs amp Start Column Modes F4 Clicking this button or pressing F4 will cause the Mode Selection function labels to be displayed The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the previous section entitled Mode Selection Device Control Device To To Advance 1 1 Advance Copy Copy Copy Modes Ext Dev Display Page Line All Page Line This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key which is equivalent to the HP 700 92 96 User System key then F1 These functions enable you to select the device s to which data is sent and also to copy portions of data from display
160. e host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported The terminal models and their display characteristics are listed below Model Display Rows x Columns 5291_1 Monochrome 24 x 80 5292_2 Colour 24 x 80 5251_11 Monochrome 24 x 80 3179_2 Colour 24 x 80 default 3196_A1 Monochrome 24 x 80 3180_2 Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477 FC Colour 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477 FG Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3486_BA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487 HA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487 HC Colour 24 x 80 5555_B01 Monochrome 24 x 80 5555_C01 Colour 24 x 80 6 43 Setup Menus The printer models are listed below 3812 1 Single byte printer 5553 B01 Double byte printer If double byte character sets are supported then select either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing Monochrome Factory default Depends on terminal type By default the setting of this option will match the normal display characteristic of the IBM 5250 Model selected as shown in the list above In the emulator all terminal types support both monochrome and colour display When monochrome is selected characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white When monochrome is not selected the settings specified in the Attributes dialog box will be used for the display Ignore Host Cursor Style Factory default Unselected Selecti
161. e second halves of the Multinational character set the first half is the ASCII character set and the other possible second halves are the ISO Latin 1 and ISO Latin 2 Additional character sets These characters may be generated when the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to DEC MCS B 4 Character Sets DEC LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET Io nim olol pl pl Oli zdl Oli ol AOIN 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o o Ijo oNN Noo Ola aja a Alo owl n nj Alo o o zk OH zlral cleal N lt x S el C aA OI D O 9 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DEciMaL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is a special DEC character set which is used by some applications B 5 Character Sets ISO LATIN 1 ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET Multinational 8 Bit 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 C Q x O oO Cc o C amp 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is one of three possible second halves of the Multinational character set the first half is the ASCII character set and the other possible second halves are the DEC Additional and ISO Lat
162. ecify the ASCII character sent to the host to indicate the end of a data block transmission To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the default ASCII character RS can be entered by typing the character twice representing the keys Ctrl which when pressed together would generate the RS code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of RS is 30 so this would be entered as _030 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Terminal ID Factory default 70092 This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported Clicking the arrow button will display a drop down list box showing the available settings 70092 2392A 2622A 70094 or 70096 If you are using the keyboard press the up or down arrow keys until the setting required is displayed You can either select from this list or enter a different terminal identity in the text box 6 24 Setup Menus Pages Factory default 4 In HP 700 92 96 mode the display area is 80 or 132 columns by 24 lines with
163. ecsssscessssececesseaesesseseceseaaees C 19 HP 700 92 96 EMUlation sornione ieai aean C 22 IBM 315 genee ege teeta ea ESA A C 26 SCO Console Emulation w cccccccccccsscccsscceesseceeseceseeecsueceeseceeaeeceenees C 29 Contents 6 Contents TACIJO EMulation ENEE C 32 DVIS S E MOON eoii suits oa sin ibs EEN C 36 Wyse EMUlations EE C 42 Wyse PC Term Emulation cccccccccscccccsscccceesseccsessececsesesecsssssseeneaes C 48 Additional Commands s iaiseriiossieiiir iieiea in ea Enea C 53 Product Specification cccscccssccsssesssessssesseeeess D 1 Contents 7 Contents Notes Contents 8 Introduction Introduction This chapter introduces the contents of this User s Guide About This User s Guide Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Introduction Introduces the contents of this User s Guide Getting Started Describes how to configure a session and describes various display features Keyboard Configuration Describes how to assign functions to keys and how to use the Compose Character function to generate special characters Mouse Functions Describes the special functions assigned to the left mouse button and how to redefine them The Toolbar Describes the function of the toolbar buttons and how to redefine the toolbar Setup Menus Describes all the commands and setup dialog boxes that can be accessed v
164. ect the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the HP 700 92 96 Emulation Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 6 When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details Display Configuration When you run the HP 700 92 96 emulation the following buttons will appear along the bottom of the display Renote Node Display Line Modify Block Functns Modify All Node futo LF 1 1 Terninal Menory Test Lock These buttons indicate the current function of keys F1 through F8 on the keyboard and are described later in this chapter The two numbers in the middle button indicate the current line and column position of the cursor The display area is 80 columns wide by 24 lines deep by default and 168 lines are stored off screen You can toggle between 80 and
165. ed When protected text is enabled only unprotected text will be printed Cursor Type This key enables you to change the appearance of the cursor By default the cursor is displayed as a reverse video block Pressing and releasing the Cursor Type key one or more times will cause the cursor display to change in the following order Blinking underline Invisible cursor Blinking reverse video block Non blinking reverse video block default N C Pressing this key will cause the display of the current text region to toggle between normal and compressed character spacing mode In normal mode the display is 81 columns wide Pressing the N C key once will change the display width to 135 columns Note that the margins will not be affected by this key v 8 CURS Cursor Type ESC F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 f OC DE NO F zen Scroll Rate PRINT SCROL HOLD N C Normal Compressed ERPG Erase Page EOL Erase To End Of Line NUM DELETE tock llo A y gt Alt key usage F13 All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps Normal key usage Fi Functions in brackets are generated when the keys are shifted 1noAe 7 pseogAey Ly padueyug uonemnwg ol Olr Od DG 410 412 Emulation Composing Characters The Data
166. ed GENEE EE Reg 10 1 Session Configuration oe ceccccesccecssccesseceeceeeneeceeeeaaeceeaceceaeeceneeeees 10 1 WBT Mode enee 10 1 None W BT MOC iiss conccsthesseveidewesetensties revenge EENS dree 10 2 Network Virtual Terminal Mode n s 10 4 Host Selection li Ries staan EE Ee TO ess 10 4 IBM 3287 1 Printer Suppott cccccccccssceesseceseeeeseceeseceeseceaceceeeeees 10 4 SysReq Key Support ccccccscccsccecsseeesseceesseeeeeceeeeeseeceequeesaneceeaeenses 10 5 The status Linesin eneren n Ea EA AA E EEAS 10 5 Text Display Options ceense 10 9 Keyboard Mapping ccccccccccscceesceessccesseceesceseneecsaeeeaeceeaeeeeaeeeeaees 10 10 Record amp Playback Keystrokes Facility cccccccccccccccsssccssssseeeees 10 12 Recording Keystrokes csiis ousiekennici oiidid 10 12 Playback Keystrokes ss cc c c sscssstssgesssesesescovsassenussescdatnevsasiseassavaaces 10 13 Editing Macros sc et ae eE EENS Z ss 10 13 Error COGS ss sterne tee eeh 10 14 Notice Board Facility ceccceccccssccesseceensecenceceseceeeeeeaaeceeaeeeeneeees 10 15 Contents 4 Contents ges le WEE 10 15 Key Functions A ease verdee ee dree die 10 15 Copying Screen Data To The Display 00 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeee 10 15 Copying Screen Data To A Function Key eee eee eeeeeeeeeeee 10 16 IBM 5250 Emulation ccccccccccccccesensnreeceseseeesssees 11 1 attente Eeer oa ea 11 1 Session Configuration cccecccccssceesseceeneeecceceseeesseceeaaeceaaeceeaeeeteeens 11 1 WBA ModE r seca E E
167. ed characters amp replace with replacement characters ESC or SUB Clear unprotected characters amp replace with null characters ESC FUNCTION KEYS Select function key set 0 set one set two ESC 7 v Reprogram a function key 955 compatible 1 value 955 compatible 1 value Key Unshifted Shifted Key Unshifted Shifted Fl 1 A F9 9 I F2 2 B F10 i J F3 3 C F11 K F4 4 D F12 lt L F5 5 E F13 M F6 6 F F14 gt N F7 T G F15 d O F8 8 H F16 P ESC i 1 2 lt message gt EM C 38 Host Command Summary Additional 1 values lt space gt Clear entire current function key set from memory 0 Load function keys in sequence 2 message destination values 1 Send message to host 2 Send message to terminal 2 Send message to both host and terminal Save function key reprogramming in non volatile memory ESC 10h Do not save function key reprogramming in non volatile memory ESC 101 Invoke a function key ESC 1 REPROGRAMMING EDITING KEYS Reprogram the SEND key 950 mode ESC 0 k c k Unshifted Shifted 1 2 e 4 ESC 4 command 7 ESC 7 command 5 ESC 5 command S ESC S command 6 ESC 6 command s ESC s command Reprogram any individual editing key 955 mode ESC 0 Ps p1 p2 p3 Reprogram all editing keys ESC Ps p1 p60 KEYBOARD amp BELL Keyboard locked ESC Keyboard unlocked ESC Lock keys ESC 1 Unlock keys ESC h 11 Set Up 13 Clear Space 12 Esc 14 Break Local editing key mo
168. ed versions of the emulator It will remove the System Control menu icon and the Minimize and Maximize buttons from the emulator window Disable Command Bar Registry Entry CmdBarTools 0 Command Line MA Default Setting on This will disable the command bar Disable Command Bar Registry Entry CommandBar off Command Line CB Default Setting on This will remove the Command bar menus tool buttons and soft buttons from the emulator window Note that the menus can still be displayed by pressing the Alt key in conjunction with the relevant keyboard accelerator For example pressing the keys Alt F will display the File menu Disable Tool Buttons On Command Bar Registry Entry CmdBarTools 1 Command Line TB Default Setting on This will disable the tool buttons on the command bar 15 12 Initialization Commands Disable Toolbar Registry Entry None Command Line L Default Setting on This command will remove the toolbar from the window Disable Menu Bar Pop Up Menus amp Toolbar Registry Entry None Command Line CB1 Default Setting on This will remove the menu bar and toolbar from the emulator window and prevent access to pop up menus using keyboard commands Disable Menu Bar Registry Entry None Command Line MB Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the menu bar from the emulator window Disable
169. efault Unselected The setting of this option determines whether received control codes are actioned or displayed When selected a representation of most control codes will be displayed on the screen Display Error Codes Factory default Selected This option determines whether or not a chequerboard symbol is displayed when the delete code is received Jump Scroll Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether data is scrolled one or several lines at a time when the window becomes full Data will scroll up several lines at a time when this is selected 80 132 Clears Screen Factory default Selected This option determines whether or not data is cleared from the display when the number of columns is changed Backspace DEL Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether or not a backspace command performs a delete 6 54 Setup Menus Ignore Nulls Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether Null characters received from the host are actioned or ignored High Function Terminal Factory default Selected This applies to the AIXTerm emulation It enables you to switch between HFT High Function Terminal mode default and VT100 mode Cursor Moves Right to Left Factory default Unselected This applies to the DEC VT AIXTerm Ansi BBS AT 386 and Sco Console emulations It enables you change the direction in which the text curso
170. efault number of lines and columns and including all window elements if enabled title bar soft buttons etc Workspace Fills Screen On Start Up Registry Entry WindowSize FullScreen Command Line F Default Setting Not applicable These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator They will cause the emulation workspace to fill the entire display when the emulator is loaded while retaining the default number of lines and columns Disable Window Frame Resize Registry Entry None Command Line WF Default Setting Enabled This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It prevents the mouse from resizing the window by dragging the edge 15 9 Initialization Commands WindowTitle Registry Entry None Command Line T title Default Setting Emulator name This enables you to specify the title that is to be displayed in the title bar This is useful when you are running more than one instance of the emulator If no title is specified then the name of your version of the emulator will be displayed Window Subtitle Registry Entry None Command Line ST subtitle Default Setting Untitled This enables you to specify a subtitle for display in the title bar of a specific emulator window By default the subtitle is the name of the session Disable Title Bar Registry Entry None Command Line TB Default Setting on This command is only avai
171. elds These attributes are also supported by the 3279 Specify if you want the right or left Control keys to perform the same function as the keypad Enter or Reset keys respectively Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box You can specify up to four hosts and you can use keyboard commands to switch between the sessions as described later in this chapter Enter the name or internet address of the host computer s in the Host box es then click Advanced for Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 2 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display
172. elease instead of ASCII codes by default The WYSE PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC Term personality supported by Wyse Keyboard scan codes are sent on key press release instead of ASCII codes by default The WY50 WY50 and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminals respectively Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for information on these emulations DEC Suite Options The VT Terminal ID option applies to the DEC VT emulations It specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported The Cursor Moves Right to Left option applies to the DEC VT Ansi BBS AIXTerm AT 386 and Sco Console emulations It enables you change the direction in which the text cursor moves across the display The High Function Terminal option is displayed when the A IXTerm emulation is selected This enables you to switch between HFT High Function Terminal mode default and VT100 mode Getting Started HP 700 92 96 Option The HP Model option specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request This can be set to 70092 default 2392A 2622A 70094 or 70096 Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported IBM 3151 Option The setting of the Model option identifie
173. ey Combinations amp Sequences You can program a soft button to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys For example you can cause a button to perform the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the lt and gt characters in the key definition text box You may omit the VK_ and NI etc parts of the virtual key name To program a soft button so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other keys together type the lt character followed by the virtual key names linked together with plus sign characters and ending with the gt character For example to program a button so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys Alt F4 together enter the following characters in the Command box lt ALT F4 gt To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys one after the other enter each virtual key name in the order required enclosing each virtual key name with the lt and gt characters Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces For example to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following cha
174. eys Cursor Type Factory default Block This enables you to specify how the text cursor is displayed Select from the following Underline Static Underline Hidden Block Static Block Status Line Factory default Unavailable This option determines whether or not the 25th screen line is used as a status line when the emulator is in any DEC VT terminal emulation mode When Unavailable or Host Writable is selected the host can write application specific messages to the 25th line Selecting None will prevent this Ignore Numlock Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether or not the Num Lock key toggles Num Lock mode on and off when pressed When selected the Num Lock key will perform the function defined by the terminal emulation 6 51 Setup Menus Preferred Font This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters The available settings depend on the fonts installed Preferred Char Set Factory default DEC MCS This enables you to specify the character set to be used for displaying characters The DEC MCS ISO Latin 1 and ISO Latin 2 settings enable you to specify the 8 bit character set that is used within VT320 mode when the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational The DEC MCS and both ISO Latin character sets consist of two tables of characters The first table ASCII 7 bit is common to all three sets and provides st
175. fication Burroughs T27 Programmer s Reference Manual 1196904 Aug 1986 Limitations Print protocol printer sessions and auxiliary i o are not supported Some local only keyboard ctrl and esc commands are not supported Data sharing and scratchpad functions are not supported Wyse 60 Native Emulation Specification WY 60 Programmer s Guide 880261 01 Rev A Limitations Only 16 colours supported not 64 Some colour commands are not supported No page edit mode Modem and aux port commands not supported No Keyboard scan code mode Character cell size commands not supported Product Specification Function key label save commands not supported Automatic font loading not supported Remote caps lock commands not supported Ignore nulls commands not supported Attribute overwrite mode not supported Disable intensity commands not supported Some select personality commands not supported Wyseword mode not supported Wyse 50 50 TVI 910 925 950 ADDS A2 HZ 1500 Wyse PC Term Specification WY355 ES Reference Manual 883227 01 Rev A Limitations All modes As Wyse 60 above where applicable TVI modes Select Print Line termination characters Wyse PC Term Default unit command not supported Program key with direction not supported Set print terminators not supported Define delimiters not supported Product Specification Notes D 8 Index Index A
176. g Mode The following keyboard functions are available when the IBM 5250 emulation is in Word Processing mode Symbols Command Begin Bold Centre Text Next Text Column Half Index Down End Attribute Find Stop Code Start New Page Required Page End Insert Stop Code Begin Underline Word Underline Half Index Up Beginning of Line End of Line Top of Page End of Page Insert Carrier Return Required Space Required Tab At 3 A Alt B Alt C Alt D Alt H Alt J Alt N Alt P Alt R Alt S Alt U Alt W Alt Y Alt Cursor Left Alt Cursor Right Alt Cursor Up Alt Cursor Down Alt Field Exit Alt Space Alt Tab Z L L PLAY CRSEL SYSRQ TEST MONO Monochrome ATIN F17 F18 F18 F20 F21 Fee 23 F24 IC PR PAUSE CRSEL Cursor Select RESET Fs F6 F7 F8 eo F10 F11 F12 f PRN CLEAR LPRT Local Print F MRK Field Mark EOL End Of Line PA1 _PA2 PA3 TYPE_ CLOSE PUSH ee DUP F MRK r DIRECT TEXT NAT LAT BACKSPACE f INSERT HOME ROLL D _ HELP FELD IN NEWLINE HOME Po Deen FIELD EXIT 7 8 9 EXIT ERFLD Erase Field __ gt _ FIELD ER EOF Erase EOF Functions in round brackets are generated when the keys are shifted Alt key usag
177. g box 4 Specify the IBM 5250 Model This is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the terminal model may be supported This also allows you to specify whether the display is treated as monochrome green for normal characters white for intense attribute or colour for attributes The terminal models currently supported and their display character istics are listed below Model Display Rows x Columns 5291 1 Monochrome 24 x 80 5292 2 Colour 24 x 80 5251 11 Monochrome 24 x 80 3179_2 Colour 24 x 80 default 3196_A1 Monochrome 24 x 80 3180_2 Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FC Colour 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FG Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3486_BA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HC Colour 24 x 80 IBM 5250 Emulation 10 11 5555_B01 Monochrome 24 x 80 5555_C01 Colour 24 x 80 The printer models supported are listed below 3812 1 Single byte printer 5553 B01 Double byte printer If double byte character sets e g Japanese are supported and you wish to use them then select either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing Specify the Monochrome setting Note that all IBM 5250 models support both monochrome and colour display When monochrome is selected characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white When mono chrome is not selected the setti
178. ght to left mode Keyboard Type The settings of the Keyboard Type SBCS and DBCS options below will reflect the default settings for the chosen language and should only be changed by the System Administrator If they have been changed and you wish to restore the default settings in this dialog box click the Default button Unlock Delay Factory default 0 When the keyboard is unlocked by the host this specifies a delay in milliseconds before characters are sent SBCS amp DBCS The Single Byte Character Set and Double Byte Character Set if supported options enable you to change the settings used by default for the chosen language These should only be changed by the System Administrator If they have been changed and you wish to restore the default settings in this dialog box click the Default button The following table shows the default settings A list of IBM EBCDIC codepages supplied can be found at the end of the Character Sets appendix If double byte character sets e g Japanese are supported and you wish to use them then set the IBM 5250 Model to either 5555_B01 monochrome or 5555_C01 colour for display or 5553 B01 for printing 6 45 Setup Menus Default Language Character Set amp Codepage Settings SBCS DBCS Language KBDTYPE CHARSET CODEPAGE CODEPAGE USB 697 37 English US English UK
179. gs 6 26 IBM 3270 settings 6 37 IBM 5250 settings 6 43 Keyboard Macros 6 68 Local Editing settings 6 57 Menudescriptions 6 7 Index 6 Index Mouse Button Actions 6 74 New Connection 6 8 Notice Board Setup 6 41 Open Session 6 9 Option selection 6 2 Save Session As 6 10 Saving settings 6 5 Serial settings 6 47 Settingsmenu 6 15 Soft Buttons 6 71 Specifying charactersinentries 6 4 TA6530 settings 6 35 Tab Stops 6 56 Terminalsettings 6 50 Wysesettings 6 30 Soft Buttons 2 28 Settingsmenu 6 71 Special Characters 6 4 Specification D 1 AIXTerm D 2 Bull BQ 3107 7107 D 2 Data General D200 D410 D 3 Digital VT emulation D 3 General D 1 HP 700 92 D 3 IBM 3151 D 4 IBM 3270 D 3 IBM 5250 D 4 ICL 7561 D 4 Stratus V102 D 5 Tandem 6526 6530 D 5 Televideo 955 D 6 Telnet D 2 Unisys T27 D 6 Wyse 60 Native D 6 Wyseemulations D 7 Status Bar 2 28 DEC VT emulations 7 4 Status Line DEC host writable 6 51 IBM 3151 emulation 12 3 IBM 3270 emulation 10 5 IBM 5250 emulation 11 5 TA6530 emulation 13 3 Wyseemulations 14 4 Stratus V102 Emulation Specification D 5 Support Level D 1 T TA6530 Emulation Host command summary C 32 Keyboard mapping 13 5 Operating modes 13 4 Rule cursor 13 5 Session configuration 13 1 Setup settings 6 35 Specification D 5 Status line 13 3 Virtual key names A 6 Tab Stops 6 56 TCP IP Connection Settings 2 10 Telnet Specification D 2 Terminal Emulation Level of support D 1 Selecting 6 17 Te
180. hat are D100 200 compatible are indicated by an CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Change attributes lt count gt lt on gt lt off gt RS F N lt nnn gt lt n gt lt n gt Blink enable ETX Blink disable EOT Blink on SO Blink off SI Dim on FS Dim off GS Protect enable RSFV Protect disable RS FW Protect on RS FL Protect off RSFM Reverse video on RSD or SYN Reverse video off RSE or STX Underscore on DC4 Underscore off NAK CURSOR d Carriage return CR Cursor left EM Cursor right CAN Cursor down SUB Cursor up ETB New line LF Read screen address RS Fb Write screen address lt column gt lt row gt RS F P lt nn gt lt nn gt Read window address ENQ Write window address DLE column row Screen home RS FG Window home BS Set cursor type RS F Q lt nn gt DISPLAY Roll enable DC2 Roll disable DC3 C 19 Host Command Summary Scroll down Scroll up Scroll left Scroll right Select compressed spacing Select normal spacing Set margins Set alternate margins Set scroll rate Set windows lt rows gt lt 0 81 cols 1 135 cols gt Show columns RSI RSH RS FC lt n gt RS FD lt n gt RSFK RSFJ RS F X lt nn gt lt nn gt RS F Y lt nn gt lt nn gt lt nn gt RS FT lt n gt RS FB lt nn gt lt n gt RS F lt nn gt lt nn gt Horizontal scroll enable RS F Horizontal scroll disable RSF Restore normal margins RS FZ EDITING
181. he OK button Keyboard Press Return Default Settings You can restore the factory default settings of all the setup options by selecting the Factory Default option in the File menu Some dialog boxes include a Default button to enable the default settings of options contained in the dialog box to be reasserted Specifying Characters In Setup Entries There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character in a setup entry For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal value backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value AT Control key value represents the control key on the keyboard e Additional value for ESC Setup Menus The following backslash values can be used u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter as and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac Creating A Connection Template You can save the current session configuration as a connection template To make the emulator automatically attempt to make a host connection using the same settings the nex
182. he cursor to move to the start of the next line scrolling the display if necessary Once the appropriate details have been entered to establish an IBM host session which may be automatic the screen is cleared and switched into full IBM 3270 terminal emulation mode as indicated by the J symbol in the status line Host Selection Up to four host connections can be specified using the Connection Wizard When two or more hosts have been configured you can use the following keyboard commands to launch or switch between each session Alt S Switch to or launch the next session if not already launched Note that this will cycle through hosts 1 to 4 if configured in order Ctrl S Switch to previous session Note that the session must already be launched as this will not launch a session Ctrl X Exits all sessions A warning message box will ask if you really want to exit Click Yes to exit all IBM 3287 1 Printer Support TN3287 printing is supported by setting the IBM 3270 Model option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box to 3287 1 When a new Telnet connection is made the display will show a message box which will indicate the current printer status When printing commences a Print Abort box will be displayed enabling you to cancel the print job Note that this will stop print data being sent but will not disconnect you from the host 10 4 IBM 3270 Emulation SysReq Key Support When the SysReq option in the Telnet
183. he keycaps Normal key usage PRINT Functions in round brackets are generated when the keys are shifted Functions in square brackets are generated when used with Ctrl 1noAe7 psreoghey Ly p vueyua uonemnwg OLc Wal IBM 3270 Emulation Record amp Playback Keystrokes Facility The record playback keystrokes facility enables you to eliminate repetitive operations by using the Fn keys to store retrieve and display data The Fn keys can store a total of 1500 keystrokes A sequence of recorded keystrokes may be interrupted so that keystrokes can be entered manually before continuing with the recording or playback Note that local Fn key functions cannot be recorded The keys used to initiate recording and playback are shown below together with the equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key on the keyboard 101 102 Key Keyboard Virtual Key Names Record Alt F7 IB_RECORD Pause Shift Pause IB_PAUSE Quit Alt Escape IB_QUIT Play Alt F8 IB_PLAY Edit Alt F3 IB_FEDIT Recording Keystrokes 1 Press Record to enter Record mode The status line will display RECRD and a number from 0 1500 indicating the number of new keystrokes that may be stored A series of boxes displayed to the right represent the Fn keys A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded keystrokes Press the Fn key which will store the keystrokes On 101
184. he keypad Enter key Getting Started TCP IP Connection Settings The TCP IP Telnet Configuration dialog box can be displayed from the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box by setting the Connection Type to TCP IP then clicking the Advanced button or the New Connection dialog box when in non WBT mode by selecting TCP IP in the Type list box then clicking the Configure button Telnet Options Port Number l 23 Telnet Name IBM 3278 2 E Local Port Number o _ Enable Keep Alives Suppress r Force Negotiation T Echo Binary no D IV 3270 Regime EOR no DI TI IN3270E 3270 Options m Break Settings IV TM with Break r TS250E E 5 L DUOTIS 820 options IT CR with Break Send Location Cancel Note that the options available and the default settings depend on the current terminal emulation Host Port Number This enables you to specify the Telnet port number The default Telnet port number 23 can be substituted with any valid 16 bit port number Specifying a number outside the valid range will cause the setting to default to 1 Local Port Number This enables you to specify the local Telnet port number if required Setting this to 0 will cause the number to be allocated automatically Telnet Name This enables you to override the name that will be reported for the terminal type over Telnet Enable Keep Alives Selecting this option will prevent the session from being disconnected from
185. he left margin is an implicit tab stop When data received from the host or entered through the keyboard reaches the right margin the cursor will move to the specified left margin on the next line down as long as InhEolWrp is not selected in the HP Settings dialog box and in the case of keyboard entered data auto line feed mode is enabled To specify the left margin place the cursor in the column for the margin location and click this button or press F5 The left margin can be reset to column 1 by pressing F7 this will also reset the right margin to column 80 Note Margins are disregarded when data is transferred from display memory to the host The margins will be cleared when Format mode is enabled Right Margin F6 This function enables you to define the right margin Margins determine the bound ary for certain cursor movement commands such as carriage return and cursor home and insert character and delete character functions Data to the right of this margin will still be accessible 9 12 HP 700 92 96 Emulation When data received from the host or entered through the keyboard reaches the specified right margin the cursor will move to the left margin on the next line down as long as InhEolWrp is not selected in the HP Settings dialog box and in the case of keyboard entered data auto line feed mode is enabled To specify the right margin place the cursor in the column for the margin location and click this but
186. his will reset the current terminal emulation mode Setup Menus New Connection Not available in WBT mode Factory default TCP IP This will display a dialog box which enables you to make a host connection New Connection Type _ Connect To repair D KL f mea l Cancel Telnet Options Sontigure The Type list box specifies whether a serial or TCP IP network host connection is to be made The Connect To box specifies the port or host to communicate with You can either make a selection from the list or enter a valid host name or internet address The host connection will be closed if you change the settings in the New Connection dialog box and attempt to connect if you log out of the host or the host closes the connection Warning messages will be displayed if the host closes the connection or you attempt to open a new session or exit the emulator while a session is open Making A Serial Host Connection To connect to a serial host select Serial in the Type list box then select the Com port required in the Connect To list box Click the Configure button to display the Serial Settings dialog box and make sure the settings match that of the host Click OK then Connect Serial Settings Baud Rate Data Bits eso mA Parity Stop Bits Cancel None D 1 bal Flow Control Transmit Rate IV OnLine l t z limited MA Input Uniimite T Local Echo Note These opt
187. ia drop down menus in the menu bar DEC VT Emulations Describes features of the DEC VT emulations DG 410 412 Emulation Describes features of the Data General D410 412 emulation HP 700 92 96 Emulation Describes features of the Hewlett Packard HP 700 92 96 emulation 1 1 Introduction Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D IBM 3270 Emulation Describes features of the IBM 3270 emulation IBM 5250 Emulation Describes features of the IBM 5250 emulation IBM 3151 Emulation Describes features of the IBM 3151 emulation TA6530 Emulation Describes features of the Tandem 6530 emulation Wyse Emulations Describes features of the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 emulations Initialization Commands Describes commands that can be included in the registry and on the command line to specify the emulator start up configuration Virtual Key Names Lists all the virtual key names that enable you to include a specific key function in a user definition for key macros and soft buttons Character Sets Shows the supported character set code tables Host Command Summary Lists the host commands that are supported in each terminal emu lation mode Product Specification Describes the level of support provided by each terminal emulation Terms amp Conventions This User s Guide uses the following terms and conventions
188. iary print mode AUX indicates that a print screen operation is in progress Standard Status Line Field 6 rrr ccc indicates the current row and column position of the cursor Extended Status Line Field6 PROT indicates that Protect mode is on Field 7 WPRT indicates that Write protect mode is on when in Protect mode Field 8 INS indicates that Insert mode is on Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where Wyse keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the Wyse keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the WY virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 14 5 Edi ESC Fi 1616 p7 Fe Fo E10 Fit ria ennen INS CH with Alt F5 F6 PRINT FUNCT INS LIN with Ctrl F1 F6 function as F13 F16 when shifted GE BACKSPACE BACKTAB D LIN TAB D CHR C LINE D Delete e gt C Clear 4 5 6 CUNEN W NEXT M 1 K 3 REPLACE DEL ENTER AO S i Alt key usage er All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps Normal key usage F2_ Numeric keypad bracketed functions are generated when Num Lock is OFF Bracketed functions not on the Numeric keypad are genera
189. ically displayed When unselected the display remains unchanged and the cursor moves off screen to the relevant page stored in memory Auto Wrap Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the right margin is reached When unselected on reaching the right margin the last character position will be overwritten by every new character received Auto New Line Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause a carriage return command to be appended to every line feed command received Auto Line Feed Factory default Unselected When selected this will cause a line feed command to be appended to every carriage return command received 6 53 Setup Menus Application Keypad Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing keys in the keypad on the right side of the keyboard When unselected the keypad is in numeric mode and keys will generate the characters shown on the key caps When selected the keypad is in application mode and keys will generate control functions when pressed The top row of four keys act as the equivalent DEC function keys PF1 through PF4 Application Cursor Keys Factory default Unselected When this option is selected the cursor keys will generate application program codes when pressed Unselected the keys will generate normal cursor movement commands Display Controls Factory d
190. ieelieiouiplr ERASE ESE l ESC F5 F6 SCRN LINE BREAK with Control with Control Ctrl Shift Alt R DWN RUP K BACKTAB PGUP TAB gt 6 PGDN Alt key usage RESET Normal key usage BREA CHAR INSERT C DEL 0 All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps Numeric keypad bracketed functions are generated when Num Lock is OFF Bracketed functions not on the Numeric keypad are generated when shifted 1noAe7 pseoghey Ly paoueyUg uoHeINW O S9VL Wyse Emulations 14 Wyse Emulations This chapter describes features of the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminal emulations Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 L Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the Wyse terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box The WY50 WY50 and WY60 emulations provide comp
191. ientation is reversed and a Push segment is created Push mode is toggled on off by pressing the keys Ctrl Shift keypad minus Push mode has two secondary modes Boundary mode and Edit mode Boundary mode is activated when Push mode is entered The cursor will remain at its current position while you type additional characters and text will be pushed in the opposite direction of the screen orientation Edit mode is activated when the cursor is moved from its Boundary position into the Push segment area In this mode text can be edited within the Push segment while typing in the field s natural direction Bilingual Keyboard Support When a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard is selected you can toggle between the National and Latin character set by pressing the keys Shift on the 11 8 IBM 5250 Emulation keypad The character N or L will be displayed on the status line to indicate which character set is currently active Selecting the Numeral Swap option in the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box will cause all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin character set mode Alternate Code Page If a language supports two code pages e g Hebrew New Code and Hebrew Old Code you can switch between the two by pressing the keys Ctrl Shift Alt on the numeric keypad This function can be assigned to a different key or key combina tion by using the AS_ALTCP virtual key name Rec
192. ier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the DEC VT terminal emulation required in the Alpha Emulation list box The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively The VT500 7 Bit and VT500 8 Bit emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT320 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT500 7 Bit is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT500 8 Bit leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT500 7 Bit Specify the required VT Terminal ID setting then click OK to close the dialog box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box DEC VT Emulations For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter
193. in 2 character sets These characters may be generated when the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to ISO Latin 1 B 6 Character Sets ISO LATIN 2 ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET Multinational 8 Bit mn Or O N re m x OO S Le HE eeh I lt Z lt O O I N Oa a aAa wo rm OO 2 Co H m m m Cc wech ch 1 CH ele SS wo Dial lt P Le H OD 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DECIMAL 1B HEXADECIMAL This is one of three possible second halves of the Multinational character set the first half is the ASCII character set and the other possible second halves are the DEC Additional and ISO Latin 1 character sets These characters may be generated when the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to ISO Latin 2 B 7 Character Sets ANSI 437 CHARACTER SET O 0n Led 4 4 eo ed EE S a Ga al AAA O OINI OO a Sol Ph LU lee i o GA S
194. inate current escape sequence SUB Transmission enabled XON DC Transmission disabled XOFF DC3 KEYBOARD Lock keyboard ESC Lock keyboard ESC 2h Unlock keyboard ESC b Unlock keyboard ESC 21 REPORTS Report configuration values ESC x Report cursor position ESC 6 Report terminal ID amp version ESC c Report status of last self test ESC 5 C 35 Host Command Summary TVI 955 Emulation GENERAL OPERATION Block mode on Local mode on Half duplex mode on Full duplex mode on Return to previous conversational mode Set terminal operating mode s 0 955 1 950 Reset terminal operating mode s 0 955 1 950 Select a terminal operating value 0 955 1 950 Select a programming compatibility mode 0 955 1 950 Reset terminal to factory default values Reset terminal to saved settings values Reset function keys to factory default values Reset editing keys to factory default values Monitor mode on Monitor mode off CHARACTER SETS amp BLOCK GRAPHICS ESCB ESCc ESCDH ESC DF ESCC ESC h ESC 1 ESC 1 2v ESC 10 v ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 ESCU ESC X or ESCu Select character set 0 US ASCII 1 UK ASCII ESC 9 v Special graphics mode on ESC Special graphics mode off ESC Select a character from the multinational character set CTRL U Read 7 bit data words ESC 11 Read 8 bit data words ESC 1h Define block graphics area ESCHwh CURSOR Cursor h
195. ing The Connection Wizard 0 ccceeeeecceeeeeecereeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeneenee 2 1 Terminal Emulation Configuration 0 cece csecesecsecnseeeeeees 2 6 Emitilation Qptionis ss sce enee e oerien yesh Se deeb sates veges Eege 2 6 DEC Suite OPONSE ea E S Ki 2 7 HP 700 92 96 OPH EE 2 8 IBM 3151 Option nsaisan mr nra e ea E Maley 2 8 IBM 3270 Optlons sorote terested aneso erene tea S ias 2 8 IBM 5250 Opttons nindeon e a E a e 2 8 TCP IP Connection Settings eserrisesrsiis reiissi 2 10 TN3270 RUE 2 12 TINS 250 RO 2 14 5250 Printer Options ises eee cesses ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseseneeeeeens 2 16 Serial Connection Settings cece ceecseecseeseeceeessecnsecseesaeenees 2 19 Automate Login Process ccesscececsseceeeceseeeseeceneeceaeeeneeceeeenaecees 2 21 Printer Port Setting Sen eege deeg ee Gidder EE ee SE 2 23 E BIR ele 2 25 AUX Port Seting E 2 26 Emulator Window Features ccccccccccccccecesssececesesssceeesecesenssaseesens 2 27 The Men BaT E N EEE veh cag EETA 2 27 Phe Toolbar iseina a e EE EE E eh 2 28 The Soft Buttons sioiias earet ietis dier ee VETE EEE aE 2 28 The Status EN 2 28 HOtSPOtS 20 gege nen a E E E E E A EE E EEEE S 2 30 Contents 1 Contents Keyboard Configuration ccccccccccsssssssseseseeeeees 3 1 Keyboard Manning 3 1 Defining Key Funecrtone 3 1 Defining A Key Or Key Combination sssssseesesseeessererrseeresrrerrrrereees 3 2 Entering Control Character 3 3 Key Combinations amp
196. ing the National character set when in Latin character set mode Alternate Code Page If a language supports two code pages e g Hebrew New Code and Hebrew Old Code you can switch between the two by pressing the keys Ctrl Shift Alt on the numeric keypad This function can be assigned to a different key or key combina tion by using the IB_ALTCP virtual key name Keyboard Mapping The illustration on the following page shows where IBM 3270 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the IBM 3270 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the IB virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 10 10 L L OL MONO Mono Case lt gt Generates Field Tab with Ctrl CRSEL Cursor Select FLCR Flashing Cursor ALTCR Alternate Cursor OUT y Lea EEN en Rie REGRO PLAY E Epa besi os ATN es re EO EOS ER Ea ED pue f PRINT CLEAR DWRD Delete Word ERINP Erase Input ER EOF Erase EOF P WRD Previous Word N WRD Next Word REVERSE DISP TYPE_ CLOSE PUSH DIRECT TEXT BACKSPACE GE CW NEWLINE Alt key usage ep All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on t
197. ing this option will cause data scrolled out of the region to be stored in a history buffer 6 52 Setup Menus Vertical Coupling Factory default Selected The setting of this VT420 mode option determines what happens when the application moves the cursor to a line not currently displayed in the window when the number of displayed lines is less than the page size When selected the display will automatically scroll vertically to keep the cursor in view When unselected the display will remain static and the cursor will move off screen to the relevant line stored in memory You can scroll the display to view the lines stored off screen by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Up or Down Cursor keys Horizontal Coupling Factory default Unselected The setting of this DEC VT mode option determines what happens when the cursor moves beyond the last column displayed in the window when there are more columns stored off screen When selected the display will automatically scroll horizontally to keep the cursor in view When unselected the display will remain static and the cursor will move off screen To scroll horizontally to view the hidden columns hold down the Ctrl key and press the Left or Right Cursor keys Page Coupling Factory default Selected The setting of this VT420 mode option determines the effect of a remote command to move the cursor to another page When selected the page to which the cursor is moved is automat
198. ion for configuring the IBM 5250 emulation for specifying serial communication settings for specifying auxilliary port settings for specifying terminal and display settings for specifying DEC VT Block Edit mode local editing functions 6 15 Setup Menus Block Transmission Attributes Keyboard Macros Soft Buttons Mouse Button Actions Button Tools for specifying DEC VT Block Edit mode text formatting and transmission for assigning colours and specifying how characters with attributes are displayed for redefining the function of keys for defining soft button functions for defining mouse functions for defining buttons on the toolbar Setup Menus Emulation Settings Emulation Settings Alpha Emulation VT Terminal ID L T500 7 Bit V T420 hd m Character Set Mode _ National Tertiary Device Attribute Answerback String I Answerback Concealed o This dialog box is displayed by selecting Emulation in the Settings menu Alpha Emulation Not available in WBT mode The setting of this option determines the current alpha emulation mode The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The AIXTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive an X terminal using X Win
199. ion M Terminal Settings ce You can create multiple connection templates any one of which can be selected for use The procedure is as follows 1 Inthe Saved Items box indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 2 Inthe Save As File Name text box enter a descriptive name to enable it to be identified for future selection This description will be listed in the Open Session dialog box 6 10 Setup Menus 3 Click the OK button to save the template settings If you specified a descriptive name that already exists a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing name with the new settings Printer Setup This will display a dialog box which enables you to specify print settings Terminal Emulation Printer Setup Printer Port Parallel Cable on LPT1 sl IT Use Network Printer LPR IT FormFeed Terminator Auto Line Feed Output Character Set fo Seconds Close Delay 150 Latin 1 sl Cancel You can direct print data to a printer handled by the Print Manager a specific port or a network printer Direct Print Data To The Print Manager The Current System Printer Driver box displays the name of the currently selected system printer when both the Use Network Printer LPR and Print Direct To Port options are not selected Clicking the Setup button will display a Print Manager dialog box which enables
200. ion configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 5 Select the terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box 6 If additional configuration options are displayed make the relevant selections Refer to the Terminal Emulation Configuration section later in this chapter for details Clicking the International Settings button will display keyboard language and character set options for the selected terminal emulation Refer to the relevant emulation settings dialog box description in the Setup Menus chapter for details Note that the DEC VT options are located in the Emulation and Terminal Settings dialog boxes 7 Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box If the IBM 3270 emula tion was selected the second dialog box shown below will be displayed TE Client Connection Wizard Host Information pConnection Type Kb Host Name O Serial Connect to Host Rollover On Connection Fail Dass TE Client Connection Wizard Host Information Hott o tota SS wots OCS netz t s Advanced Getting Started For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button and enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box Selecting the Host Rollover On Connection Fail option will present four Host Name entry boxes The emulator will attempt to connect to each specified host in turn until one is success ful Click Advanced for Telnet options Refer
201. ion that will be taken if the button is clicked Item 4 Indicates the current terminal emulation Item 5 This displays the active session always 1 the current page number always 1 and the line column location of the text cursor Item 6 This indicates whether Overstrike Mode or Insert Mode is currently selected In Overstrike Mode default new characters will replace already existing characters at the cursor position When Insert Mode is selected new characters will be inserted at the cursor position without deleting existing characters which will move to the right Item 7 This will display Lock when the keyboard is locked or Edit when the terminal emulation is in Edit mode Item 8 This will display the time in 24 hour format when in DEC VT500 mode if the VT525 set time command has been received from the host Item 9 Indicates the status of the printer as follows None signifies that the printer is not turned on or not connected or not installed in Microsoft Windows Not Ready signifies that the printer is not ready to receive data for printing Ready signifies that the printer is ready to receive data for printing DEC VT Emulations Auto signifies that the emulation is in Auto Print mode in which the current cursor line is sent to the printer when a command for the cursor to move to the next line is issued Controller signifies that the emulation is in Printer Controller mode in which the host has direct co
202. ions are described in the Serial Settings section later in this chapter and only apply when the connection type is set to Serial 6 8 Setup Menus Making A Network Host Connection To connect to a network host node select TCP IP in the Type list box The Connect To box will display the available devices on the network Select the name of the device required or enter the host name or IP address If the session was created using the Connection Wizard and the Host Rollover On Connection Fail option was selected you can specify up to three more hosts in the boxes below The emulator will attempt to connect to each specified host in turn until one is successful Clicking the Telnet Options button will display a dialog box with additional options These are described in the Getting Started chapter Telnet Options Port Number 23 Telnet Name IBM 3278 2 E Local Port Number 0 IT Enable Keep Alives gt Suppress __ Force Negotiation en T Echo Binary fno zl IV 3270 Regime EOR fno v T IN3270E 3270 Options Break Settings r M TM with Break TN5250E I CR with Break Send Location Cancel Clicking the Connect button or the name of the host in the Connect To list box twice will cause the emulator to attempt to connect to the specified host If a connection cannot be made because the network driver is not installed or the host node name is invalid an error message will indicate this Failure to connect for a
203. ith a network gateway in ASCII for routing logon etc before the full IBM terminal emulation protocol is established NVT mode is indicated by the absence of the J symbol in the status line along the bottom of the window NVT mode displays an unformatted screen for data entry allowing basic keyboard functionality as a simple ASCII terminal In addition to data keys other recognized keys are Clear clears the screen Enter sends a CR to the host Newline sends a CR to the host Backspace sends a BS to the host Tab sends an HT to the host Once the appropriate details have been entered to establish an IBM host session which may be automatic the screen is cleared and switched into full IBM 5250 terminal emulation mode as indicated by the J symbol in the status line The Status Line The last line in the window is used to display status information in the form of symbols and alphanumeric characters A coloured line separates status information from the rest of the display Information is displayed in any of six regions within the status line as listed below Region Symbol Colour Column Meaning 1 T Blue 1 Telnet session running 2 8 Blue 18 On line IBM 5250 mode 3 M Blue 28 Message waiting 4 K Blue 48 Insert mode on 5 X Red 57 Input inhibited 6 rr cc or rr ccc White 75 80 Row column cursor position The meaning of the symbols is as follows T Indicates that a Telnet session is running E Indicates that the current screen
204. lable for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the title bar from the window Disable Min Maximize amp Close Buttons Registry Entry None Command Line SY Default Setting on This will remove the Control System menu icon and the minimize and maximize buttons from the emulator window 15 10 Initialization Commands Disable Minimize Button Registry Entry MinimizeBox off Command Line MN Default Setting on These commands will remove the minimize button from the emulator window Disable Maximize Button Registry Entry MaximizeBox off Command Line MX Default Setting on These commands will remove the maximize button from the emulator window Disable Close Window Items Registry Entry MenuCloseItem off Command Line MT Default Setting on These commands will remove the Close window option from the Control System menu and disable the close window X button at the top right corner of the emulator window Disable System Menu Registry Entry SystemMenu off Command Line None Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It will remove the System Control menu icon from the emulator window 15 11 Initialization Commands Disable System Menu amp Min Maximize Buttons Registry Entry SystemMenu none Command Line None Default Setting on This command is only available for NT or XP embedd
205. lar to 6 74 Setup Menus the hotspot feature It enables you to send delimited text displayed on the screen to the host just by clicking on it Delimiters are the same as for hotspots The Move Cursor function can be used in any of the local block modes as a quick way of positioning the text cursor within a block of text To position the text cursor move the mouse pointer to the position required hold down the modifier key s assigned with the function then click the left mouse button The Cursor Select function does the same as Move Cursor but when running the IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation it also performs a cursor select The Middle Button setting enables you to make the left or right button and key combination of a two button mouse emulate the middle button of a three button mouse The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked 6 75 Setup Menus Button Tools Button Tools Current Tool New Connection 4 Delete Current Buttons Commands New Connection Insert at Current Open Session Paste Ctrl Add Custom Print Buffer Print Screen Delete Custom Printer Setup Replay File KS Reset Terminal y IV Visible Save Session Save Session As cancel v x Select All sl sec This dialog box is displayed by selecting Button Tools in the Settings menu
206. lator automatically closes the network connection when it is exited 15 6 Initialization Commands Session Configuration Start up Command Group To Action Registry Entry None Command Line Nname Default Setting Default You can specify more than one set of start up commands in the registry This enables you to configure each instance of the emulator differently Each set of commands other than the default set must have the following heading in the registry under HKLM Software Pericom lt product name gt Startup name where name can be any unique identifying name You can specify which set of start up commands the emulator is to use by including the following on the command line for loading the emulator where name is substituted with the actual name of the start up group required Nname If this command is not present then the emulator will use the start up commands under the Startup Default heading Connection Template To Use Registry Entry None Command Line SE description Default Setting Untitled This command enables you to override the default connection template used when the emulator is loaded as specified in the Open Session dialog box The description must exactly match the description assigned to a connection template already saved using the Save Session As dialog box and must be enclosed by double quotes Disable Bell Registry Entry Bell off Command Line BE Default Setting Enab
207. lays the name of the currently selected system printer when both the Use Network Printer LPR and Print Direct To Port options are not selected Clicking the Configure button will display a Print Manager dialog box which enables you to specify printer settings If you find a through print results in data being split into lines each treated as a separate print job specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box e g 5 seconds This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely When set to 0 printing will not start until a print end of job command is received from the host Entering any other number will cause printing to start after the specified number of seconds have elapsed regardless of whether the print end of job command has been received from the host Direct Print Data To A Specific Port To direct print data to a specific port select Print Direct To Port and specify the Printer Port Selecting the FormFeed Terminator option will cause the printer to advance the paper to the top of the form when it has finished printing 2 23 Getting Started The Output Character Set option enables you to specify the character set used for printing when Print Direct To Port is selected This allows non ISO Latin 1 printers to be used Selecting Auto Line Feed will cause the printer to print at the beginning of
208. le to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the key definition box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt 6 69 Setup Menus Specifying Characters There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal value backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value AT Control key value represents the control key on the keyboard e Additional value for ESC The following backslash values can be used u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter as and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac 6 70 Setup Menus Soft Buttons Soft Buttons gt Button Definitions gt r Current Definitions Level Ci Oz IL L Name Command a e Title ie ce igs SS q Add gt Button 1 x T Local Name lt Remove Command Predefined Macros gt Apply VK CONTROL v Een Visible Levels
209. lect Semicolon Separator Setup Shift right Slash backward Slash forward Spacebar Square Bracket left Square Bracket right Tab Windows left Windows right Virtual Key Name VK_NUMPADO 9 VK_ADD VK_DIVIDE VK_DECIMAL VK_MULTIPLY VK_SUBTRACT VK_NUMLOCK VK_OFF VK_NEXT VK_PRIOR VK_PASTE VK_PAUSE VK_PERIOD VK_PRINT VK_SNAPSHOT VK_BACKQUOTE VK_RETURN VK_SCROLL VK_SELECT VK_SEMICOLON VK_SEPARATOR VK_SETUP VK_RSHIFT VK_BACKSLASH VK_SLASH VK_SPACE VK_LBRACKET VK_RBRACKET VK_TAB VK_LWIN VK_RWIN A 1 Virtual Key Names DEC VT500 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Back Tab VT_CSIZ Insert VT_INSERT Break VT_BREAK Keypad 0 9 VT_PADO 9 Backspace VT_BACKSPACE Keypad Comma VT_COMMA Compose Character WT_COMPOSE Keypad Decimal VT_PADDECIMAL Cursor Down VT_DOWN Keypad Minus VT_MINUS Cursor Left VT_LEFT Next Page VT_NEXT Cursor Right VT_RIGHT PF1 PF4 VT PPI VT_PF4 Cursor Up VT_UP Previous Page VT_PREV Datatalk VT_DATATALK Print VT_PRINT Delete VT_DELETE Remove VT_REMOVE Do F16 VT_DO Return VT_RETURN Enter VT_ENTER Scroll Down VT_PANDOWN Escape VT_ESCAPE Scroll Left VT_PANLEFT F6 F14 VT_F6 VT_F14 Scroll Right VT_PANRIGHT F17 F20 VT_F17 VT_F20 Scroll Up VT_PANUP Find VT_FIND Select VT_SELECT Help F15 VT_HELP Setup VT_SETUP Hold Screen VT_HOLD Tab VT_TAB DG 410 412 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Ke
210. lect a bitmap file from which a button will be automatically generated 6 76 Setup Menus Specify the name of the bitmap file to use then click the OK button The dialog box will close and you will see the new button bitmap highlighted at the bottom of the Buttons list box If you want to delete a custom button from the Buttons list box select the button bitmap then click the Delete Custom button DO NOT click the Delete Current button as this will remove the currently selected button tool from the toolbar Note that you cannot delete the predefined button bitmaps displayed by default Assigning Functions To Buttons You can assign a variety of functions to the buttons You can either enter a definition of your own in the same way as for keyboard macros and soft buttons or you can select a menu command from the Commands list box The buttons displayed in the toolbar by default are defined with some of the functions listed in the setup menus Refer to The Toolbar chapter for details These enable you to quickly action a command or display a setup dialog box without having to display the menu first The Commands list box displays all the menu items that can be assigned to the buttons To assign a function to a button make sure that the button bitmap required is displayed in the Current Tool box enter the new definition in the associated text box or select a menu command from the Commands list box then click the Change Current but
211. led These commands enable you to turn off the terminal bell 15 7 Initialization Commands Enable Debug File Capture Replay Registry Entry None Command Line Debug Default Setting Disabled This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It enables the File Capture and File Replay options in the File menu which allow received host data to be logged in a file then replayed Enable Debug Log Send amp Receive Registry Entry None Command Line Debug2Way Default Setting Disabled This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator It enables the File Capture and File Replay options in the File menu which allow received host data and data sent to the host to be logged in a file then replayed 15 8 Initialization Commands Display Window Minimized On Start Up Registry Entry WindowSize minimized Command Line MI Default Setting Not applicable These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator They will cause the window to be displayed as an icon when the emulator is loaded Window Maximized On Start Up Registry Entry WindowSize maximized Command Line MA Default Setting Not applicable These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator They will cause the window to be displayed at the maximum size possible when the emulator is loaded while retaining the d
212. ll be added to the Script window on the right The Wait For options enable you to specify the prompt or keyboard locked or unlocked command that the automatic login process is to wait for before proceed ing Some systems are case sensitive so make sure your Text entries follow the correct conventions for your system Note When running the IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation Text entries are only applicable in NVT mode Enter the response required in the Respond With box In order for a text entry to be sent to the host it must be followed by a carriage return command This is specified by selecting C Return in the list of predefined commands in the list box below then clicking the Insert button A lt CR gt will appear in the Respond With box You can also enter a predefined key function in the Respond With box by selecting Key Definition in the list of predefined commands in the list box 2 21 Getting Started below selecting one of the virtual key names listed in the box below that then clicking the Insert button The Virtual Key Names appendix lists the predefined key functions available for each emulation The list of predefined commands that can be inserted include UserName indicated by lt UN gt and Password indicated by lt PW gt Selecting either of these will cause a dialog box to pop up when logging on to the host prompting the user to enter a name or password respectively You can also delay the script response
213. lphanumeric keys will cause characters to be sent to the host HP 700 92 96 Emulation Terminal Test F5 When this button or F5 key is pressed the HP 700 92 96 emulation will perform a self test and display a test screen showing all the displayable characters Memory Lock F6 This enables data to be locked on the display so that it is not scrolled off the top of the window when display memory is full Once enabled it can only be disabled if this button or F6 key is pressed again a reset is performed or the emulation is exited Placing the cursor on the first line and enabling Memory Lock will prevent data from automatically scrolling off the top of the display when display memory is full Instead the message MEMORY FULL Press RETURN to clear will be displayed You may use the cursor keys to edit data already displayed To disable the Memory Lock and continue entering new data press F6 or click the button again and position the cursor immediately below the last line The Memory Lock function may also be used to lock a specific number of lines from the top of the display leaving the remaining lines to scroll past them This is useful when you want column headings or instructions to remain on the display To lock a specific number of lines place the cursor on the last line to be locked and press F6 or click the button The lines from the top of the display down to the cursor line will now be locked Note You can edit data c
214. ls from cursor Clear unprotected line foreground to nulls from cursor Clear unprotected line to spaces from cursor Clear unprotected line foreground to spaces from cursor Clear unprotected page to attribute character ESC c H line col character ESC c H line col character ESC ESC ESC ESCcK ESC c I character ESCt ESC cS ESC T ESCcR ESC C 42 Host Command Summary Clear unprotected page to nulls Clear unprotected page to nulls from cursor Clear unprotected page foreground to nulls from cursor Clear unprotected page to spaces Clear unprotected page to spaces from cursor Clear unprotected page foreground to spaces from cursor Clear unprotected page to specified character Clear unprotected rectangle in 80 column page Clear unprotected rectangle in 132 column page Clear unprotected to end of line with nulls Clear unprotected to end of line with spaces Box rectangle in 80 column page Box rectangle in 132 column page Box rectangle to right of cursor COLOUR SELECTION ESC ESC y ESCcQ ESC or SUB ESC Y ESC c P ESC character ESC c F line col character ESC c F line col character ESCcL ESCcO ESC c G line column ESC c G line column ESC c N width height Wyse 350 colour Select colour palette palette ID in range 0 Redefine attribute association ESC ESC m r c m r display attribute group or write protect to be redefined range 0 8
215. mbol Colour N Blue L Blue 5 TN3270E Device Name Symbol Colour dddddddd White 6 Shift Symbol Colour NUM Blue 7 Mode Symbol Symbol Colour A Blue 8 Display Direction Symbol Colour gt Blue Blue 9 Cursor Position Symbol Colour rr cc or rr ccc White Column 20 20 Column 22 29 Column 43 45 Column 53 Column 73 73 Column 75 80 Meaning National character set mode Latin character set mode Meaning TN3270E actual device name connected as Meaning Numeric lock on Meaning Insert mode on Meaning Normal display Right to left mirror display Meaning Row column cursor position 10 6 IBM 3270 Emulation Readiness amp System Connection T This indicates that a Telnet session is running A This indicates that the protocol for communication between an application program and the IBM 3270 emulation is not system network architecture SNA J This indicates that the current screen is a Network Virtual Ter minal screen This screen is displayed when IBM 3270 mode is entered before a telnet session has been initiated with the remote host This enables you to enter login text Note that you will be returned to this screen when you log off 8 This indicates that the current screen is an IBM 3270 screen This screen will be displayed when you have initiated a Telnet session with the host D This indicates that you are currently communicating with
216. me CR ESC c 2 handshake ESC c 4 handshake Select terminal emulation emulation Wyse 50 Wyse 50 Wyse 60 4 TVI 910 TVI 912 920 TVI 925 ADDS VP A2 HZ 1500 amp VT52 VT100 VT220 7 VT220 8 VT320 7 VT320 8 ESC emulation 6 AWA C 45 Host Command Summary Enhance mode on Enhance mode off Monitor mode on display control codes Monitor mode off Block mode on Half duplex mode on Half duplex block mode on Full duplex mode on ACK mode 6 off 7 on Set MODEM port operating parameters Set maximum data transmission speed Send terminal ID Program answerback message Answerback message conceal lt send KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS ESC ESC SP ESCU ESCu orESCX ESC B ESC CESC DH ESC D H ESCB ESC C ESC D F ESCe ESC c 0 b s p w ESC c 6 max ESC SP ESC c answer CTRL Y ESCc Application key mode on ESC 3 Application key mode off ESC 2 Keyboard locked ESC or SI Keyboard unlocked ESC or SO Caps lock on ESC e amp Caps lock off ESC e Clear all programmable keys ESC c U Clear key definition ESC z key DEL Key repeat on ESCe Key repeat off ESCe Margin bell on ESCeM Margin bell off ESCeL Set margin bell at cursor position ESC J Program function key definition ESC z fkey seq DEL Program key direction amp definition ESC Z dir key seq DEL Read key direction amp definition ESC Z key Sound Bell BEL Turn local edit m
217. mmand Summary Set text parameters ESC t 007 Change window name amp title to t 0 Sets only the icon name 1 Sets only the title name 2 EDITING Delete characters from cursor position right ESC P Delete lines from cursor position down ESC M Erase characters from cursor right ESC X Erase area is one of the following ESC O Erase to end of area 0 Erase from area start 1 Erase entire area 2 Erase display is one of the following ESC J Erase to end of display 0 Erase from display start 1 Erase entire display 2 Erase field is one of the following ESC N Erase to end of field 0 Erase from field start 1 Erase entire field 2 Erase line is one of the following ESC K Erase to end of line 0 Erase from line start 1 Erase entire line 2 Insert blank lines ESC L Insert space characters ESC GENERAL OPERATION Lock shift G2 ESCn Lock shift G3 ESC o Reset to initial state ESCc ANSI specified modes ESC h IRM insert mode 4 SRM send rec mode HFT 12 TSM tab stop mode HFT 18 LNM linefeed newline 20 XTERM private modes ESC h 132 80 column mode 40 Scrollbar hide show 42 Save scroll text on off 43 Margin bell on off 44 Reverse wraparound on off 45 Screen buffer alternate normal 47 Status line reverse normal 48 Scroll mode page normal 49 C 17 Host Command Summary Other private modes Normal application cursor VT 100 80 132 columns Reverse normal vi
218. mulation C 29 TA6530 emulation C 32 TVI955 emulation C 36 VT400 emulation C 6 VT420 emulation C 12 VT510 emulation C 9 VT52 emulation C 1 Wyseemulations C 42 Wyse PC Term emulation C 48 Host Communications Auxport setup menu 6 49 Serial settings menu 6 47 Host Information Connection Wizard 2 2 Hotspots Displaying all 2 30 Using 2 30 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Configuration selection 9 8 Devicecontrol 9 8 Display attributes 9 16 Function keys amp labels 9 3 Host command summary C 22 Key programming 9 13 Keyboard mapping 9 3 Margins tabs column 9 11 Modeselection 9 5 Session configuration 9 1 Setup settings 6 20 Specification D 3 Index 3 Index Virtual key names A 3 IBM 3151 Emulation Host command summary C 26 Introduction 12 1 Keyboard mapping 12 4 Session configuration 12 1 Setup 6 26 Specification D 4 Statusbar 12 3 IBM 3270 Emulation Bilingual keyboard support 10 10 Character sets Austrian B 27 Belgian B 31 Canadian bilingual B 23 Danish B 25 English UK B 24 English US B 23 Finnish B 30 French B 26 German B 27 Italian B 28 Netherlands B 23 Norwegian B 25 Spanish B 29 Swedish B 30 Swiss French B 31 Swiss German B 31 Close key 10 9 Display right to left 10 9 Display rule 6 38 Hostselection 10 4 Introduction 10 1 Keyboard mapping 10 10 Notice Board facility 10 15 Notice Board setup 6 41 NVT mode 10 4 Printer support 6 37 10 4 Push mode 10 9 Record playback keystrokes 10 12
219. n dialog box then click Next DG 410 412 Emulation The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the DG 410 412 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connec
220. n will disable the Ctrl C copy and Ctrl V paste keyboard commands By default a warning message will be displayed if you attempt to exit the emulator while a host connection is still active You can disable this message by selecting the No connection warning on close option The Action on Host Close options enable you to specify how the emulator responds when the host closes the connection Selecting Display Options will cause a dialog box to be displayed with the following three options Selecting Shutdown will cause the emulator to shutdown Selecting Stay Alive will keep the emulator running Selecting Reconnect will cause the emulator to attempt to reconnect to the host The Mouse Cursor Style option enables you to choose from a range of cursor styles 2 25 Getting Started Aux Port Settings The Aux Port Settings dialog box enables you to specify a COM or LPT port for bidirectional output when in any DEC VT mode ANSI BBS Sco Console HP 700 92 96 or IBM 3151 mode TE Client Connection Wizard Aux Port Settings Auzilliary Port X Configure lt Back Cancel Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box in which you can specify settings for the COM port The options in it are described in the Serial Settings section earlier in this chapter Configuration of COM1 r Baud Rate r Data Bits G re Ok Parity Stop Bits Cancel None X 1 Elow Control input fed
221. nality supported by the DEC VT terminal emulations The block mode settings that are supported by other terminal emulations are specified in their respective dialog boxes Send Unprotected Only Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether protected characters can be sent to the host or not When unselected both protected and unprotected characters will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed When selected only unprotected characters will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed Send Only Selected Areas Factory default Unselected The setting of this option determines whether all characters or only those in selected areas on the current page are sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed When unselected all characters on the current page will be sent when the Enter key is pressed When selected this option will enable only the characters in selected areas to be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed The setting of the Send All Selected Areas option determines which selected areas are sent 6 59 Setup Menus Send All Selected Areas Factory default Selected When the Send Only Selected Characters option is selected the setting of this option determines whether all selected areas on a page are sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed or only the area containing the cursor When selected this option will enable all selected areas to be sent to the host
222. ndicated by a tick when auto print mode is on Auto print mode causes each line of data to be transmitted to the printer when the cursor moves to a new line as a result of a carriage return line feed vertical tab or form feed Cancel Print This will cancel the current Print Screen or Print Buffer function Eject Page This option enables data that has been spooled to the printer to be printed Exit This option will cause the emulator to shut down 6 13 Setup Menus Edit Menu v Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics Select All Clear Buffer Clipboard Text Clipboard Graphics Selecting one of these options will enable selected text or graphics to be copied to the clipboard when the Copy command is used The Paste and Select All commands will also be enabled A tick will be displayed next to the option when it is selected Copy The Copy commands become available when data has been selected They will cause the currently selected text or graphics to be copied to the clipboard The data can then be inserted in a different position or another file using the Paste command The next block of data that is copied will delete the previous block on the clipboard The first Copy option enables you to perform a standard copy The last three options are only available when Clipboard Graphics is selected They enable you to copy the graphics image with black and white reversed with colour converted to monochrome or both
223. ne of six or eight fields along the first section of the status line depending on whether the Standard or Extended status line is displayed The messages and their meanings are listed below FDX 001 001 1234 5 6 7 8 Host Messages Standard amp Extended Status Line Field1 Indicates the current keyboard mode CAPS indicates that Caps Lock is on Press the Caps Lock key to toggle the mode on and off LOCK indicates that the keyboard is locked This takes precedence over the CAPS and NUM messages NUM indicates that Num Lock is on Press the Num Lock key to toggle the mode on and off 14 4 Wyse Emulations Field2 Indicates the number of the page that is currently displayed No message is displayed when the current page is 0 Field 3 indicates that Monitor mode is on In this mode received codes are not actioned but displayed as symbolic representations Field 4 Indicates the current operating mode FDX indicates full duplex mode HDX indicates half duplex mode LCL indicates local mode BLK indicates block mode HBLK indicates half duplex block mode HLD indicates that display update has been suspended Pressing the Hold key will toggle display update on and off Field5 gt AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary print or transparent print mode lt AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary receive mode AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary receive mode and auxil
224. ng ESC 7i Disable bidirectional printing ESC 6i Enable printer tablet to talk directly to host one way ESC 9i Disable printer tablet from talking directly to host ESC 8i Destination port only first is parameter 0 None 1 LPT 1 2 2 COM 1 3 COM 2 etc ESC u REPORTS Request colour table report ESC 2 u Request control function settings ESCP q Request cursor information report ESC 1 w Request emulation state report ESC 1 u Request locator device port status ESC 55n Request locator device type ESC 56n Request mode settings ESC p Request tab stop report ESC 2 w Request user preferred Additional set ESC amp u Restore colour table ESC P2 p Restore cursor information ESCP1 t Restore emulation state ESCP1 p Restore tab stops ESC P2 t C 8 Host Command Summary ANSI VT510 Emulation When running the VT510 emulation the following commands will be executed in addition those listed previously for ANSI VT100 and VT500 USER DEFINED KEYS Download definitions for user defined keys DCS c 1 m D D ST c Oornone 1 Oornone 1 m 0 2 or none 1 3 4 vertical bar D D are the key Clear all keys before loading new values 0 is default Load new UDK values clear old values only when redefined Lock the keys Do not lock the keys against future redefinition Defines the shifted function key Defines the unshifted function key Defines the alternate unshifted function
225. ng Started GUI Overrides The GUI Overrides dialog box enables you to disable various GUI items and also enables you to specify how the emulator responds when the host closes the connection TE Client Connection Wizard GUI Overrides T No connection Warming on close Menu Bar Items r Action on Host Close Tl Disable All CS Display Options Tl Disable File Menu C Shutdown Tl Disable Edit Menu C Stay Alive I Disable Settings Menu C Reconnect IT Disable Close Button I Maximise Display Usage I Disable Status Bar I Disable Tool Bar I Disable Title Bar I Disable Soft Buttons Mouse Cursor Style I Beam sl I Disable Clipboard Accelerators lt Back Cancel Selecting the Use Full Screen option will cause the emulation workspace to fill the entire display while retaining the default number of lines and columns Note that the title bar menu bar tool bar and soft buttons will not be displayed even if they are enabled The menus can be accessed by using the relevant keyboard accelerators Selecting the Maximise Display Usage option will cause the teemtalk window to be displayed at the maximum size possible while retaining the default number of lines and columns and including all window elements if enabled title bar menu bar etc The Disable options enable you to disable any or all of the menu bar items the title bar tool bar soft buttons and the status bar The Disable Clipboard Accelerators optio
226. ng Started may be supported The terminal models and their display characteristics are listed below Model Display Rows x Columns 5291 1 Monochrome 24 x 80 5292 2 Colour 24 x 80 5251 11 Monochrome 24 x 80 3179_2 Colour 24 x 80 default 3196_A1 Monochrome 24 x 80 3180_2 Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FC Colour 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3477_FG Monochrome 24 x 80 and 27 x 132 3486_BA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HA Monochrome 24 x 80 3487_HC Colour 24 x 80 The printer models are listed below 3812 1 Single byte printer The setting of the IBM 5250 Monochrome option will match the normal display characteristic of the selected IBM 5250 model by default Note that the emulation of all IBM 5250 models supports both monochrome and colour display When monochrome is selected characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white When monochrome is not selected the settings specified in the Attributes dialog box described in the Setup Menus chapter will be used for the display The setting of the Left Ctrl acts as Reset Key option determines whether or not the left Control key performs the same function as the Reset key The setting of the Right Ctrl acts as Enter Key option determines whether or not the right Control key performs the same function as the keypad Enter key The setting of the Carriage Return acts as Enter Key option determines whether or not the Return key performs the same function as t
227. ng this option will cause the emulator to ignore any commands from the host to change the cursor style Enhanced UI Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will enable support of the IBM 5250 Extended User Interface for generating windows on the screen Note that menus and scroll bars are not supported Hide WP Controls Factory default Unselected This enables you to toggle the display of word processing characters on and off Rule Line Factory default Cross A rule can be displayed across the emulation workspace at the cursor position by pressing the keys Alt Page Down which toggles it on and off The setting of this option determines whether it is displayed as a horizontal rule vertical rule or both cross Follows Cursor Factory default Unselected When the rule is displayed in the emulation workspace the setting of this option determines whether or not the rule follows the cursor when it moves 6 44 Setup Menus Font This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters The available settings depend on the fonts installed Numeral Swap Factory default Unselected When using a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard this will cause all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin mode Symbol Swap Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause symbols such as brackets to be displayed the correct way round when typing in ri
228. ngs specified in the Attributes dialog box de scribed in the Setup Menus chapter will be used for the display Click OK to close the dialog box Select Save Session in the File menu Select New Connection in the File menu to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection If necessary enter the appropriate information to establish an IBM host session in the Network Virtual Terminal mode screen When an IBM host session has been established the screen will switch out of Network Virtual Terminal mode and display the IBM 5250 emulation screen Note You will be returned to the Network Virtual Terminal screen when the connection to the IBM host has been closed IBM 5250 Emulation Network Virtual Terminal Mode Network Virtual Terminal NVT mode allows the operator to communicate w
229. nnection Information dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box 12 1 IBM 3151 Emulation Select the IBM 3151 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for crea
230. ns shown by the buttons at the bottom of the window so pressing F4 or the Default Values button will cause the default key and button definitions to be asserted The default definitions will take effect once the User Key Definition menu is exited 9 13 HP 700 92 96 Emulation f g f f 3 f fe Next Previous Default 1 4 Display Choice Choice Values Functns Key String Treatment Each f key and button definition displayed in the menu consists of two lines The first line begins with the f key number followed by space then a one character attribute field This field will contain either an uppercase L T or N These characters indicate the following L The key string is executed locally T The key string is transmitted to the host only N The key string is treated as keyboard entered data The default selection is T for all f keys To change this setting use the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the cursor over the field then press F2 Next Choice button or F3 Previous Choice button to cycle through the options until the one required is displayed Function Indicator The remainder of the first line is used to specify what is displayed on the screen button to indicate its function The default display shows the numbers of the f keys The two fields following LABEL represent the upper and lower lines that can be displayed on the button To change the current definition use the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the
231. nsert mode Al ready existing characters to the right of the cursor will move to make room for new characters that are entered Insert mode can 10 8 IBM 3270 Emulation be disabled by pressing the Reset or SysReq key or by per forming any action that sends data to the host such as pressing the Enter Clear PA or PF keys Display Direction gt ore This indicates the orientation of the screen display A right arrow indicates normal left to right display a left arrow indi cates a right to left mirror image display The display can be toggled between the two directions by pressing the keys Shift Backspace Text Display Options Display Right to Left The contents of the screen can be displayed in reverse i e as a right to left mirror image by pressing the keys Shift Backspace This is a toggle function so pressing the keys again will revert to normal left to right display An arrow will be displayed on the status line to indicate normal right arrow or mirror left arrow display Typing Direction The direction in which characters are displayed on the screen when typed can be toggled between normal left to right and right to left by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad The characters gt or lt will be displayed on the status line to indicate the current typing direction Selecting the Symbol Swap option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box will cause symbols such as round or angle brackets to be dis
232. nt selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earlier in step 3 then click the Connect button Non WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the HP 700 92 96 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box This emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett Packard 700 92 2392A 2622A 70094 and 70096 terminals Click OK to close the dialog box Display the HP Settings dialog box from the Settings menu and specify the required Terminal ID setting 70092 default 2392A 2622A 70094 or 70096 then click OK to close the dialog box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Sel
233. ntrol over the printer Print screen commands issued from the keyboard or mouse will be ignored ErrGen indicates that an error has occurred and a message box will be displayed indicating the error Item 10 This indicates the keyboard mode It will be blank when the keyboard is in normal mode and will display DEC when in DEC mode You can toggle between normal and DEC mode by pressing the keys Alt Num Lock together Refer to the illustrations in the Keyboard Mapping section for the key functions available in each mode Item11 Indicates the status of the aux port as follows Ready indicates that the aux port is ready for bidirectional output In Use indicates that the aux port is currently busy Horizontal Scrolling It is possible to make the width of display memory larger than the width of the window by using the Memory Page Width option in the Terminal Settings dialog box When you want to view columns stored off screen you can scroll horizontally by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor keys Keyboard Mapping The illustrations on the following pages show where DEC VT500 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the DEC VT keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the VT virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box The keyboard can be used in two modes Normal and DEC Y
234. number of lines on each page ESCH Lines Number of Pages per Page 4 Page Memory 2 Page Memory Set 24 4 2 2 48 2 1 S 96 1 Autopage mode on ESC v Autopage mode off ESC w Display previous page ESCJ Display next page ESCK Display page ESC 1 SCROLLING Define a scrolling region ESC t br Enable line lock ESC 1 Disable line lock ESC 2 SENDING SCREEN DATA Reprogram delimiter d characters 1 E 2 ESC x d 1 2 0 Field Separator 2 Start of protected field 4 Message terminator 1 End of line 3 End of protected field C 40 Host Command Summary Send unprotected characters in cursor line up to amp including cursor ESC 4 Send unprotected page up to amp including cursor ESC 5 Send entire cursor line characters up to amp including cursor ESC 6 Send entire page up to amp including cursor ESC 7 Send unprotected message between start of text and end of text ESCS Send whole message between start of text STX and end of text ETX ESC s TAB STOPS Clear typewriter tab stop at cursor position ESC 2 Clear all typewriter tab stops ESC 3 Create column of tab stops at cursor position ESC 1 Move cursor forward to next typewriter or field tab stop HT Move cursor forward to next field tab stop ESCi Move cursor backward to previous typewriter or field tab stop ESCI C 41 Host Command Summary Wyse Emulations ATTRIBUTES Assign character display attribute Assign line attribute Assign write protected character
235. ny other reason will result in a Connection Failed message Open Session Not available in WBT mode This enables you to select a connection template The following dialog box will be displayed m Defined Sessions D Session Delete Cancel 6 9 Setup Menus The Defined Sessions list box displays the names of connection templates that were created using the Save Session As dialog box The name of the connection template currently in use is highlighted The factory default connection template is Untitled Selecting one of the descriptions then clicking the OK button will cause the dialog box to close and the connection template associated with the chosen description to be actioned You can specify a particular connection template to use by default by clicking the required description then clicking the Save As Default button To delete a connection template select the description then click the Delete button Close Session Not available in WBT mode This will close the current session Save Session Selecting this option will save the current session configuration Save Session As Not available in WBT mode This will display a dialog box which enables you to save the current session configuration as a connection template Save Session As Save As File Name Saved Items IV Keyboard Macros IV Soft Buttons M Attributes M Window Metrics I Text Rows M Buffer Rows I Connect
236. o x Cancel This dialog box is displayed by selecting Soft Buttons in the Settings menu A set of soft buttons can be displayed along the bottom of the window These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked Level 1 You can define up to four soft button levels Each level consists of twelve programma ble buttons providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons Levels stored off screen can be scrolled into view by clicking the Level button The setting of the Visible Levels option determines button visibility Setting this to 0 will cause no soft buttons to be displayed Programming A Soft Button 1 Select the Level number 2 Ifrequired specify the Title that will be displayed in the window for this level 3 Select the Button number 4 Check the Local check box to make the button definition action locally or uncheck it to transmit the definition to the host when the button is pressed 5 Enter a Name to be displayed on the button up to ten characters long 6 Enter the button definition in the Command box or make a selection from the list of Predefined Macros then click Apply 6 71 Setup Menus 7 Click the Add button to accept the definition The new definition will be added to the Current Definitions list 8 To save the definitions click OK to exit then select Save Session As in the File menu make sure the Soft Buttons box is checked then click OK K
237. ode on duplex edit mode off ESCk Turn local edit mode off duplex edit mode on ESC 1 LABEL LINE Clear function key label ESC z field CR Clear shifted label line message ESC z CR Clear unshifted label line message ESC z CR Display shifted label line ESC zP CR Program display function key label ESC z field label CR Program display unshifted label line Program shifted label line ESC z text CR ESC z text CR Shifted label line off ESC z DEL SENDING DATA Begin print send at top of page ESC d Begin print send at top of screen ESC d amp Bidirectional mode off ESC d C 46 Host Command Summary Bidirectional mode on Enable transmission XON XOFF handshaking Stop transmission KON XOFF handshaking Mark block beginning Mark block end Print entire formatted page Print formatted unprotected page Print unformatted page Secondary receive mode off Secondary receive mode on Send ACK Send cursor character Send entire block Send entire cursor line Send entire page Send unprotected characters in block Send unprotected cursor line Send unprotected page Send next incoming character to printer port Transparent print mode on Turn auxiliary print mode on Turn print modes off ESC d DC1 XON DC3 XOFF ESC 8 ESC 9 ESC P ESC ESC p or ESCL ESC d SP ESCd ENQ ESCM ESC s ESC 6 ESC 7 ESC S ESC 4 ESC 5 DLE ESC d or CAN DC2 DC4 C 47 Host Command Summary
238. of the functions listed in the setup menus These enable you to quickly action a command or display a setup dialog box without having to display the menu first The Commands list box displays all the menu items that can be assigned to the buttons To assign a function to a button make sure that the button bitmap required is displayed in the Current Tool box enter the new definition in the associated text box or select a menu command from the Commands list box then click the Change Current button to action the change The toolbar will not be updated until you click the OK button to close the dialog box Entering Control Characters You can enter a control character in a button tool definition either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the control character for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 Refer to the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references The Toolbar Key Combinations amp Sequences You can program a button tool to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys
239. ol character CR carriage return has a decimal value of 13 Adding 64 makes 77 which is the decimal value of the displayable character M When the Ctrl control key is held down and Shift M is pressed this will generate a CR code in local mode Some setup options require you to specify one or more control characters A control character can be specified by typing to represent the Ctrl key immediately followed by the displayable character equivalent of the control character as described in the previous paragraph For example M represents Ctrl M which generates the control character CR Another way of specifying control characters is by entering the decimal value of the ASCII character Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as 013 Character Sets ASCII CHARACTER SET Multinational 7 Bit IO nim o O mi O OI IN OO ol AOIN 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 zk OH gt cleal N sl x S lt c 4 Oil IOoi 9 33 OCTAL KEY ESC 27 DEcimaL 1B HEXADECIMAL The ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange character set will be selected when the language is set to North American or the Char
240. olour value for foreground Green or Saturation colour value for foreground Blue or Luminosity colour value for foreground Red or Hue colour value for background Green or Saturation colour value for background Blue or Luminosity colour value for background Colour pair to be initialized Colour pair to be selected Colour pair definition status Assign colours to colour pair decimal ESC amp v a b c x y z lt colour pair gt i Select an alpha colour pair 0 7 ESC amp v S EDITING Clear display memory from cursor ESCJ Clear line or field from cursor ESCK Delete character ESC P Delete line ESCM Insert character mode ESCQ Insert line ESCL Modify all mode disabled ESC amp k0M Modify all mode enabled ESC amp k1M Replace character mode ESCR Unprotected field end ESC Unprotected field start ESC C 23 Host Command Summary FUNCTION KEYS Begin user key definition mode ESC j Default definition for f1 key ESC p Default definition for f2 key ESC q Default definition for f3 key ESCr Default definition for f4 key ESCs Default definition for f5 key ESCt Default definition for f6 key ESCu Default definition for f7 key ESC v Default definition for f8 key ESC w Define f key ESC amp f Disable User System amp Menu and label Modes ESC amp jS Enable User System amp Menu and label Modes ESC amp jR Enable f keys amp remove labels and status line ESC amp j Enable amp display Modes labels E
241. ome ESC H or RS Line feed LF Reverse line feed ESC j New line line feed carriage return US Carriage return CR Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor up one line VT Move cursor down one line SYN Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor right one column FF Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor left one column BS Move cursor to line 1 and column c ESC 1 c H Move cursor to line 1 and column c ESC 1 cf Send cursor to line 1 amp columns 1 80 c ESC c Send cursor to line 1 amp columns 81 132 c ESC ze Send cursor to page p line 1 amp columns 1 80 c ESC p 1 c Send cursor to page p line GI amp columns 81 132 c ESC p l ze C 36 Host Command Summary Read cursor s line amp column position ESC Read cursor s page line amp column position ESC Read cursor s line amp column position in decimal units ESC 6n Read cursor s page line amp column position in decimal units ESC 6n DISPLAY Turn screen on ESC n Turn screen off ESC o Light background with dark characters ESC b Dark background with light characters ESCd Define visual attribute s ESC G 0 Normal default video 8 Underline 1 Invisible normal video 9 Invisible underline 2 Flash Underline amp flash 3 Invisible flash Invisible underline amp flash 4 Reverse current background lt Reverse amp underline
242. ommand summary C 19 Keyboard mapping 8 3 Session configuration 8 1 Specification D 3 Virtual key names A 2 Display 80 column font 6 50 80 132 columns 6 50 Buffersize 6 51 Control codes 6 54 Cursortype 6 51 DEC status line 6 51 Errorcodes 6 54 Jump smooth scroll 6 54 6 55 Languageselection 2 1 6 15 Preferredfont 6 39 6 45 6 52 Index 2 Rows 6 50 Textattributes 6 63 Display Elements Hotspots 2 30 4 3 Status bar 2 28 Status line DEC VT emulations 7 4 IBM 3151 emulation 12 3 IBM 3270 emulation 10 5 IBM 5250 emulation 11 5 Wyseemulations 14 4 E Edit Menu 6 14 Edit Mode Indicator 2 29 7 4 Editing Text 6 14 Emulation Settings 6 17 Emulation Support Level D 1 Enhanced AT Keyboard Mapping DEC VT500 functions DEC mode 7 7 Normal mode 7 6 DG 410 412 functions 8 4 HP 700 92 96 functions 9 4 IBM 3151 functions 12 5 IBM 3270 functions 10 11 IBM 5250 functions 11 7 TA6530 functions 13 6 Wyse functions 14 6 Entering Codes In Setup Entries 6 4 Error Messages TA6530 emulation 13 3 EuroCharacter 6 5 F Factory Default Setup 6 4 File Menu 6 7 Floating Button Palette Removing buttons 5 5 Flow Control 2 19 6 47 Font Selection 6 39 6 45 6 52 G Getting Started Toolbar functions 5 1 GUI Overrides Connection Wizard 2 25 H Host Command Summary AIXTermemulation C 15 ANSI VT100 emulation C 2 DG 410 412 emulation C 19 HP 700 92 96 emulation C 22 IBM 3151 emulation C 26 SCO Console e
243. on When running the VT420 emulation the following commands will be executed in addition those listed previously for ANSI VT100 and VT500 CURSOR MOVEMENT amp PANNING Back index ESC 6 Forward index ESC 9 Pan down Gl number of lines ESC IS Pan up Cl number of lines ESC 1T Vertical cursor coupled mode ESC 6lh Vertical cursor uncoupled mode ESC 611 Page cursor coupled mode ESC 64h Page cursor uncoupled mode ESC 641 EDITING Delete column s Ge number of columns to delete ESC c Insert column s c number of columns to insert ESC c GENERAL OPERATION Secure reset n any number in range 0 16383 ESC n p Secure reset confirmation n number in range 0 16383 ESC n q MACROS Define macro ESC P n d e z D D ESC n Macro ID number 0 63 d Delete all macros 0 Delete current macro 1 e Encoding format for macro text Standard ASCII characters 0 Hex pairs for each ASCII character 1 Control data string DD Repeat sequence introducer Invoke macro n macro ID number KEYBOARD ESC n z Enable local functions n Function number All local functions Local copy amp paste Local panning Local window resize LA H rz OO Se ESC n zer n c q Control performed Factory default 0 Enable local function Disable local function 2 C 12 Host Command Summary Local function key control ESC k f k f
244. on in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details The Tandem 6530 emulation is configured using the TA6530 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter 13 2 TA6530 Emulation The Status Line The last 25th line in the window is used to display messages and status information You can enable or disable display of a border which separates this line from the rest of the lines above it by setting the Status Border option in the TA6530 Settings dialog box accordingly The status line is divided into two fields The fir
245. onsole is an emulation of the SCO UNIX box Getting Started The TA6530 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Tandem 6530 terminal This emulation is described in the TA6530 Emulation chapter The TVI 910 TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910 920 and 925 terminals respectively as emulated by the Wyse WY 50 50 60 terminals Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details The TVI 950 and TVI 955 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the TeleVideo 950 and 955 terminals respectively The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for information on these emulations The VT500 7 Bit and VT500 8 Bit emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT320 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT500 7 Bit is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT500 8 Bit leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT500 7 Bit Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for information on these emulations The VT PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC Term mode supported by DEC This is the same as the VT510 emulation except that keyboard scan codes are sent on key press r
246. ontained in locked lines but if new data is inserted it may cause data on the last line of the locked region to be pushed down into the scrolling region Display Functions F7 This button and the F7 key toggles the Display Functions mode on or off The effect of activating Display Functions mode depends on whether the emulation is in Local or Remote mode In Local mode activating Display Functions mode will cause sub sequently received control codes and escape sequences to be displayed on the screen but not actioned Exceptions to this rule are the commands issued when the button or F7 key is pressed and the carriage return and line feed commands which will be executed In Remote mode activating Display Functions mode will cause subsequently received control codes and escape sequences to be transmitted to the host but not actioned locally Exceptions to this rule are the commands issued when the button or F7 key is pressed and the carriage return and line feed commands which will be executed If the Local Echo option is enabled in the HP Settings dialog box see the Setup Menus chapter commands will be displayed on the screen as well as transmit ted to the host Note If the XmitFnctn A option is selected in the HP Settings dialog box the button and F7 key will not deactivate Display Functions mode HP 700 92 96 Emulation Auto LF F8 This button and the F8 key enables or disables Auto Line Feed mode When enabled a lin
247. ontal tab stop at active position 0 Vertical tab at cursor line HFT 1 Horizontal tabs on line HFT 2 All horizontal tabs 3 All vertical tabs HFT 4 Vertical tab stop HFT ESCI Cursor backward tabs ESC Z Cursor horizontal absolute ESC G Cursor forward tabs HFT ESC I Cursor tab stop control HFT ESC W Cursor down lines HFT ESC E Cursor up lines ESC F Horizontal tab stop ESCH Index cursor move down one line ESCD Reverse index cursor move up one line ESCM Move cursor to beginning of next line ESCE Move cursor left columns ESC D Move cursor down lines ESC B Move cursor right columns ESC C Move cursor to line 1 column c ESC 1 cf Move cursor to line 1 column c ESC l cH Move cursor up lines ESC A Move cursor up tabs HFT ESC Y Restore cursor position ESC u Save cursor position ESC s DISPLAY Restore cursor amp attributes ESC 8 Save cursor amp attributes ESC7 Scroll display down lines HFT ESC T Scroll display up lines ESC S Scroll left columns HFT ESC SP Scroll right columns HFT ESC SPA Select screen direction HFT ESC 1 18S Left to right set to Latin keyboard 0 Right to left set to National keyboard 1 Screen alignment display ESC 8 Set top amp bottom margins ESC t br Erase status line ESC E Return from status line ESC F Hide status line ESC H Show status line ESC S Go to column of status line ESC T C 16 Host Co
248. options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection If necessary enter the appropriate information to establish an IBM host session in the Network Virtual Terminal mode screen When an IBM host session has been established the screen will switch out of Network Virtual Terminal mode and display the IBM 3270 emulation screen Note You will be returned to the Network Virtual Terminal screen when the connection to the IBM host has been closed 10 3 IBM 3270 Emulation Network Virtual Terminal Mode Network Virtual Terminal NVT mode allows the operator to communicate with a network gateway in ASCII for routing logon etc before the full IBM terminal emulation protocol is established NVT mode is indicated by the 2 symbol in the status line along the bottom of the display NVT mode displays an unformatted screen for data entry allowing most of the keyboard functionality for local editing However when the Enter key is pressed the line that the cursor is positioned on will be sent over Telnet as an ASCII string with CR LF terminators The cursor will then be positioned at the start of the next line ASCII data received over Telnet will also be displayed at the current cursor position A CR character will be actioned as a new line character causing t
249. or keys to move the red target area to the required position on the display You can also use the Jump key to move the target area to the host screen or Notice Board Press Enter on the numeric keypad to save the copied area at the current position on the display Copying Screen Data To A Function Key Note that the Notice Board Setup dialog box has several options which determine whether this facility is enabled and whether all screen data in the selected area is copied or only data in user entry fields 1 2 Position the text cursor at the start of the area to be copied Press the Copy key to start the Copy function Note that the status line will display the key functions available Use the cursor keys to move the text cursor to the diagonally opposite corner of the display area to be copied The currently selected area will be highlighted in green Note that you can toggle the position of the text cursor between the two diagonally opposite corners of the selected area by pressing the Return key Press F14 to copy the selected area Press the function key required to store the copied data Press Enter on the numeric keypad to store the copied data in the chosen function key 10 16 IBM 5250 Emulation 11 IBM 5250 Emulation This chapter describes features of the IBM 5250 terminal emulation Introduction The IBM 5250 emulator provides emulation of 5250 type alphanumeric terminals both monochrome green
250. ord amp Playback Keystrokes Facility The record playback keystrokes facility enables you to eliminate repetitive operations by using the Fn keys to store retrieve and display data The Fn keys can store a total of 1500 keystrokes A sequence of recorded keystrokes may be interrupted so that keystrokes can be entered manually before continuing with the recording or playback Note that local Fn key functions cannot be recorded The keys used to initiate recording and playback are shown below together with the equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key on the keyboard 101 102 Key Keyboard Virtual Key Names Record Alt F4 AS_RECORD Pause Shift Pause AS_PAUSE Quit Alt LControl see note AS_QUIT Play Alt F5 AS_PLAY Note Quit is Alt Left Control if Left Control is defined as the Reset key Recording Keystrokes 1 Press Record to enter Record mode The status line will display RECRD and a number from 0 1500 indicating the number of new keystrokes that may be stored A series of boxes displayed to the right represent the Fn keys A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded keystrokes IBM 5250 Emulation 2 Press the Fn key which will store the keystrokes On 101 102 keyboards you can also use Shift Fn The status line will display R F where R indicates you are in Record mode Zi is the number of keystrokes that may be
251. ose button 15 10 Disable minimize button 15 11 Disable mouse editing 15 18 Disable scrollbar 15 15 Disable Settings menu 15 15 Disable status bar amp DEC status line 15 16 Disable title bar 15 10 Disable tool buttons 15 12 Disabletoolbar 15 13 Disable Tools menu 15 15 Disable window frame resize 15 9 Enable debug File Capture Replay 15 8 Enable Debug Log Send amp Receive 15 8 Flashing forall sessions 15 17 New session warning message 15 5 Preload Winsock DLL for PPP usage 15 5 Reflection 4 colour support 15 17 Soft buttons displayed 15 16 Summary 15 2 Window maximized 15 9 Window minimized 15 9 Window subtitle 15 10 Window title 15 10 Workspace fills screen 15 9 Compose CharacterSequences 3 4 Connection Information Connection Wizard 2 1 Connection Template Creating 6 5 Selecting 6 6 Connection Wizard Automate Login Process 2 21 Aux Port Settings 2 26 Connection Information 2 1 GUI Overrides 2 25 Host Information 2 2 Printer Port Settings 2 23 Control Characters B 1 Displaying 6 54 Keyboardequivalents B 1 Conventions 1 2 Copy amp Paste Edit menu options 6 14 Using mouse 4 2 Cursor Positioning in block mode 4 2 D DEC Multinational Set 6 52 DEC VT Emulations Horizontal scrolling 7 5 Keyboard mapping 7 5 Specification D 3 Statusbar 7 4 Default Setup Settings 6 4 6 7 DG 410 412 Emulation Character sets Alphabet B 12 Line Drawing B 13 Math B 12 Word Processing B 12 Host c
252. osition bottom right corner The Select Word function will cause the word under the mouse cursor to be selected The Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically The Rectangular Select and Copy function is the same as Select Rectangle but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard automatically Moving The Cursor In Block Mode When the emulator is in any of the local block modes you can use the mouse instead of the cursor keys to position the text cursor using the Move Cursor function To position the text cursor move the mouse pointer to the position required hold down the Alt key then click the left mouse button The Cursor Select function does the same as Move Cursor but when running the IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation it also performs a cursor select Mouse Functions Send Keyword The Send Keyword function enables you to click on any delimited word displayed on the screen and it will be sent to the host as long as the word is not already defined as a hotspot Keyword delimiters are space NULL and Show amp Action Hotspots A hotspot facility is provided which enables you to invoke a function by clicking the mouse pointer on a keyword displayed on the screen For example an application may display information relating to keys you can press to perform a particular function Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard yo
253. otected spaces ESC V Protect mode off ESC Protect mode on ESC amp GRAPHICS CHARACTERS Line drawing graphics mode on ESC Line drawing graphics mode off ESC C 49 Host Command Summary CURSOR CONTROL Cursor left backspace Cursor right Cursor up no scroll Cursor up scroll Cursor down no scroll Cursor down scroll Cursor to start of line Cursor to start of next line Move cursor to home position on current page Move cursor to specific line End of line wrap mode off End of line wrap mode on Received CR mode CR Received CR mode CRLF Autopage mode off Autopage mode on Address cursor in 80 column current page Address cursor in specific 80 column page Address cursor in specific 80 column window Read cursor address in 80 column current page CTRLH CTRLL CTRLK ESC j CTRL V CTRLJ CTRLM CTRL ESC or CTRL ESC line ESC 0 ESC ESC 9 ESC 8 ESC w ESC v ESC line col ESC page line col ESC wind page line col ESC Read 80 column window page number amp cursor address ESC EDITING Clear all tab stops ESC 3 Set tab stop ESC 1 Clear tab stop ESC 2 Tabulate cursor ESCi or CTRLI Backtab ESCI Insert mode on replace mode off ESC Z Insert mode off replace mode on ESCr Insert space character ESCQ Insert line of spaces ESCE Delete cursor character ESC W Delete cursor line ESCR CLEARING DATA Clear page to nulls ESC Clear page to spaces ESC
254. ou can toggle between the two modes by pressing the keys Alt Num Lock together The 10th item on the status bar will display DEC when the keyboard is in DEC mode The field will be blank when in normal mode 9 Z Alt Num Lock toggles between Normal amp DEC mode DELETE f Insert Home DE ET yfo DELETE SELECT SCRL 4 Alt key usage F Normal key usage pp All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps Functions in round brackets are generated when used in conjunction with Control Functions in square brackets are generated in application keypad mode pOoN EWION 1noAe7 pseoghey Ly paoueyUug SUOUEIOUI LA 94d Z Z Alt Num Lock toggles between Normal amp DEC mode DELETE PREV NORM Kaes INSERT FIND PF2 PF3 BACKSPACE ISCREEN EXT REMV SELECT ec Alt key usage Normal key usage F11 HOLD All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps Functions in square brackets are generated in application keypad mode Spo 220 1noAe7 pseoghey Ly p vueyug SUud EINWF A
255. own 84 117 Insert 75 Keypad Enter 108 118 Delete 76 Return 43 119 Home 80 Backspace 15 120 End 81 Tab 16 Is a delimiter Hex Code String Function UDS UDS Direction Specifies the hex code of the character to be transmitted with each of the four modifier states in the following order Unshifted Shifted Alternate Shifted Shift 2 and Control if omitted use default Use a period as a place holder for an undefined modifier combination The hex code represents a valid code in the current 7 bit or 8 bit character set mon Use a minus preceding the hex representation of a diacritical sign if a diacritical mark is to be defined Is a number associated with a local function as listed below For example function number 0 makes the key or key modifier inoperative Function number 100 indicates a user defined sequence UDS and a UDS direction is defined following the slash delimiter 0 No Function 91 Backspace 93 Escape 100 UDS 92 Cancel 94 Delete Is the user defined sequence specified in Hex format Each hex code in this string represents a value transmitted by the defined key combined with the modifiers Specifies the transmission direction DU or none Normal Host and or terminal default 1 Local Terminal only 2 Remote Host only C 10 Host Command Summary PROGRAMMING FUNCTION KEYS Program Function Key s DCS x D D ST where the data string D D format is as follo
256. p 31 Specification IBM 3151 Ascii Display Station Reference Manual GA18 2634 01 1989 ICL 7561 Specification ICL DRS300 manual R15722 001 Appendix 1 September 1986 Limitations Some field validation checks are not supported Load templates are not supported Host print protocol is not supported Product Specification Stratus V102 Specification V102 Display Terminal Operator s Manual TVI 131974 00 June 1985 Limitations Page print flip mode not supported Serial configuration commands not supported Select character set commands not supported Tandem 6526 6530 Emulation Specification Tandem 653x Multi Page Terminal Programmer s Guide 82310 B00 December 1983 Limitations Telnet Line Mode is not supported Ansi media copy commands are not supported No support for auxiliary port No support for extended buffer and cursor commands String configuration machine and directory commands not supported Data table re definition commands not supported Remote termination not supported T O device and file commands not supported Set colour configuration commands not supported Product Specification Televideo 955 Specification Televideo 955 Display Terminal Operator s Manual 131969 00 B Sept 1985 Limitations Page print flip mode not supported Serial configuration commands not supported Select character set commands not supported Unisys T27 Speci
257. p k1P Function key codes local only ESC amp s0A Function key codes transmitted to host ESC amp s1lA Lock keyboard ESC c Space overwrite latch disabled ESC amp s0B Space overwrite latch enabled ESC amp s 1B SPOW latch off ESC amp kON SPOW latch on ESC amp k1IN Unlock keyboard ESC b LOCAL EDITING MODE Data block for transmission is cursor line ESC amp s0D Data block for transmission is page ESC amp s1D Enter edit mode ESC amp k 1B Enter interactive mode ESC amp k0B Transmit block of text to host ESC d PRINTING Copy all to printer Copy display memory to printer Copy line to printer Copy page to printer ESC amp pM or ESC amp p0M ESC 0 ESC amp pB or ESC amp p0B ESC amp pF or ESC amp pOF Data transfer host to printer 1 256 ESC amp p W Disable logging ESC amp p13C Enable bottom logging ESC amp pll1C Enable top logging ESC amp p 12C Execute form feed ESC amp p4u0C Execute line feeds ESC amp p1l 4ulC Record mode on is optional ESC amp p 20C Select external device ESC amp p4D Transfer display escape sequences no ESC amp sON Transfer display escape sequences yes ESC amp s1N REPORTS Request cursor position report disabled ESC amp x0C Request cursor position report enabled ESC amp x1C Request external printer status report ESC amp p4 Request primary terminal status report ESC Request secondary terminal status report ESC Request terminal identity report ESC s Reque
258. playback operation press the Quit key Error Codes The following error codes may appear on the status line if an error occurs during recording or playback 11 10 IBM 5250 Emulation 9001 9003 9007 9010 9015 9019 Exceeded the maximum number of allowed keystrokes Remedy Press the Record key to exit Record mode To record a new keystroke sequence either a Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data then enter the new data b Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data then press the Delete key to erase the recorded data for that key You pressed an invalid Fn key while performing the Record or Play function Remedy Press the Reset key You pressed an invalid sequence key e g Play while performing the Record function Remedy Press the Reset key While performing the Play function you pressed an Fn key that does not have a keystroke assigned to it Remedy Press the Reset key In communication mode you pressed either the Quit or Pause key Remedy Press the Reset key In Record or Play mode While the Record play pause indicator was displayed on the status line you pressed an invalid key e g Play key in Record mode or Record key in Play mode Remedy Press the Reset key Fax Image Support Fax images in Tiff PCX and G3 format are supported The following display facilities are supported if the host provides them Scrollba
259. played data scrolls up and the cursor remains on the last line When unselected the cursor moves to the top of the same page 6 32 Setup Menus Auto Page Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 WY 60 and all the TVI emulations It determines what happens when the cursor reaches the top or bottom of the page When unselected the cursor either moves to the top of the same page or data scrolls up from the bottom as determined by the setting of the Auto Scroll option When selected anew page of memory will be displayed Note The other emulations will always display a new page of memory Auto Wrap Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the right margin is reached When unselected on reaching the right margin the last character position will be overwritten by every new character received DEL DestBS Factory default Unselected This option applies to the WY 50 and WY 60 emulations and determines what effect an ASCII DEL character has on displayed characters The other emulations ignore the DEL character When unselected the DEL character is ignored When selected the DEL character is interpreted as a destructive backspace causing the character to the left of the cursor to be deleted and the cursor to move into that position Margin Bell Factory default Unselected This option applies to all emulations and specifies whe
260. played the correct way round when typing right to left Close Key If text has been typed using both typing direction modes in the same line or field you can force the right hand text to join the left hand text by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad Push Mode Push mode allows you to edit text whose direction is opposite the screen orientation In this mode the cursor orientation is reversed and a Push segment is created Push mode is toggled on off by pressing the keys Ctrl Shift keypad minus 10 9 IBM 3270 Emulation Push mode has two secondary modes Boundary mode and Edit mode Boundary mode is activated when Push mode is entered The cursor will remain at its current position while you type additional characters and text will be pushed in the opposite direction of the screen orientation Edit mode is activated when the cursor is moved from its Boundary position into the Push segment area In this mode text can be edited within the Push segment while typing in the field s natural direction Bilingual Keyboard Support When a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard is selected you can toggle between the National and Latin character set by pressing the keys Shift on the keypad The character N or L will be displayed on the status line to indicate which character set is currently active Selecting the Numeral Swap option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box will cause all numbers to be displayed us
261. quire you to type information in a text box such as the End of Line Characters option When an option has many possible settings these will be shown in a list box The Alpha Emulation option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is an example of this To make a selection using the mouse click the arrow button to display a drop down list box then click on the setting required If the list is long a scroll bar may be displayed To make a selection using the keyboard press the up or down cursor keys to cycle through the available settings until the one required is highlighted in the box 6 3 Setup Menus To select a dialog box option Mouse Click the check box button or list box The current setting is highlighted or surrounded by a dotted rectangle or both Keyboard Move to the option to be changed either by holding down the Alt key and pressing the key bearing the character underlined in the option if one is displayed or press the Tab key to move forward through the options left to right top to bottom or Shift Tab to move backwards until the required option is highlighted Press the Spacebar to toggle check boxes or buttons on or off To close a dialog box without actioning changes Mouse Click the Cancel button Keyboard Press the Tab or Shift Tab keys to move the cursor until it rests over the Cancel button and press Return or the Spacebar To close a dialog box and action changes Mouse Click t
262. r Terminal ID Factory default Unspecified This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request The terminal ID can be up to 20 characters long Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported Model Factory default 11 This option identifies the terminal model being emulated in response to a terminal identification request from the host Model 11 supports only one viewport containing 24 or 25 rows and 80 columns Model 31 supports up to three viewports 80 or 132 columns wide and pass through printing 6 29 Setup Menus Wyse Settings Wyse Settings Lines Status Line Standard DI Cancel Page Size r Block End Default fi x Lines D US 7 CR hd SE KW Set Tabs Attribute Type r Code Page Page ai PC Multinational 437 Y C WPRT Attribute AG Font M Dim wy ASCII i I Invisible Bo Multiple Page S 80 132 Clears T Underline C Economy 80 J Blink Mauto Scroll xl This dialog box is displayed by selecting Wyse in the Settings menu Note that some of the settings apply to the TVI 910 TVI 920 TVI 925 ADDS A2 and HZ 1500 emulations in addition to the Wyse emulations Also some settings may not apply to the particular Wyse emulation currently running Selecting a setting that is not applicable to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for that emulation when the
263. r Down TA_DOWN Line Insert TA_LINEINS Cursor Left TA_LEFT Num Lock TA_NUMLOCK Cursor Right TA_RIGHT Page Down TA_PAGEDOWN Cursor Up TA_UP Page Up TA_PAGEUP Delete TA_DEL Print Screen TA_PRTSCR End TA_END Return TA_RETURN Erase Line TA_ERASELINE Roll Down TA_ROLLDOWN Erase Page TA_ERASEPAGE Roll Up TA_ROLLUP Escape TA_ESC Tab TA_TAB Fl F16 TA_FI TA_F16 Tab Clear TA_TABCLEAR Home TA_HOME Tab Clear All TA_TABCLRALL Keypad 0 9 TA_PADO TA_PAD9 Tab Set TA_TABSET A 6 Virtual Key Names TVI 955 Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Back Tab TV_BACKTAB FO F22 TV_FO TV_F22 Backspace TV_BACKSP Go To TV_GOTO Break TV_BREAK Keypad 00 TV_PADOO Clear Entry TV_CLRENTRY Line Feed TV_LINEFEED Clear Space TV_CLRSPACE Misc Functions TV_MO TV_M9 Cursor Down TV_DOWN No Scroll TV_NOSCROLL Cursor Left TV_LEFT Print TV_PRINT Cursor Right TV_RIGHT Reset TV_RESET Cursor Up TV_UP Return TV_RETURN Delete TV_DELETE Status TV_STATUS Enter TV_ENTER Tab TV_TAB Escape TV_ESCAPE Wyse Virtual Key Names Key Function Virtual Key Name Key Function Virtual Key Name Backspace WY_BACKSPACE Delete WY_DELCHAR Cursor Down WY_DOWN Delete shifted WY_DELLINE Cursor Left WY_LEFT End WY_CLRLINE Cursor Right WY_RIGHT End shifted WY_CLRSCRN Cursor Up WY UP Insert WY_INSCHAR Delete WY_DELETE Insert shifted WY_INSLINE Del Key WY_DELKEY Insert shifted WY_REPLACE End WY_END Print shifted WY_SEND Enter WY_ENTER
264. r attribute Set field attribute Set field attribute response Create 1 viewport 24 rows x 80 chars Create 1 viewport 25 rows x 80 chars Create 1 viewport 24 rows x 132 chars Create 1 viewport 25 rows x 132 chars Create 2 viewports in 80 column screen Create 2 viewports in 132 column screen Create 3 viewports in 80 column screen Create 3 viewports in 132 column screen ESC amp ESC ESC o ESC message ESC ESC ESC 4 attrib operation ESC 3 attrib attrib operation ESC 3 attrib attrib ESC SPr SP8 P ESC SPr SP9 P ESC SPr SP8 D ESC SPr SP9 D ESC SPr SP rl 0 SP r2 P ESC SPr SP r1 SP r2 D ESC SPr SP rl 0 SP r2 0 SP r3 P ESC SPr SP r1 SP r2 SP r3 D Note The ASCII character values of rl r2 and r3 are listed below When creating two viewports rl r2 must be 24 or 25 When creating three viewports rl r2 r3 must be 24 or 25 Rows ASCII Rows ASCII Rows ASCII Rows ASCII 1 8 14 A 20 4 2 g 9 15 21 5 3 10 x 16 0 22 6 4 11 17 1 23 7 5 12 S 18 2 24 8 6 amp 13 19 3 25 9 7 i Select active partition command response not model 11 ESC q Select host partition command response not model 11 ESC SP q A Viewport 1 B Viewport 2 C Viewport 3 Jump partition command response not model 11 ESC A Enable partition separator line not model 11 ESC Disable partition separator line not model 11 ESC EDITING Delete char
265. r moves across the display Keyboard Sends Scan Codes Factory default Selected This applies to the VT PC Term and Wyse PC Term emulations It determines whether keyboard scan codes or ASCII codes are sent on key press release 6 55 Setup Menus Tab Stops 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 T T T T T T T T T T 4 Clear All Set Every fe This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Set Tabs button in the Terminal Settings or Wyse Settings dialog box Tab stops can be set for the DEC VT ANSI and SCO Console emulations using the Tab Stops dialog box displayed from the Terminal Settings dialog box and for the Wyse emulations by using the Tab Stops dialog box displayed from the Wyse Settings dialog box Tab stops are set every eight columns by default as indicated by the T character below the relevant column numbers If you want tab stops to be set at regular intervals other than every 8th column enter the number of columns required between each tab stop next to the Set Every button then click the button Individual tab stops can be toggled on or off by clicking the mouse pointer above or below the relevant column number To remove all the tab stops click the Clear All button To save the current tab stops select Save Session in the File menu 6 56 Setup Menus Local Editing Local Editing Edit Operation C Inte
266. r to the Printer Port Settings section later in this chapter for details Getting Started TE Client Connection Wizard Printer Port Settings Printer Port Parallel Cable on LPT1 sl E Use Network Printer LPR M Print Direct To IT FormFeed Terminator IT Auto Line Feed Output Character Set fo Seconds Close Delay 150 Latin 1 sl lt Back Next gt i Cancel et 1 Make the relevant selections if required then click Next to display the GUI Overrides dialog box 10 The GUI Overrides dialog box allows you to disable various GUI items and also enables you to specify how the emulator responds when the host closes the connection Refer to the GUI Overrides section later in this chapter for details ent Connection Wizard GUI Overrides ri r T No connection Waring on close Menu Bar ltem en r Action on Host Close T Disable All Display Options I Disable File Menu C Shutdown T Disable Edit Menu C Stay Alive I Disable Settings Menu C Reconnect I Disable Close Button I Maximise Display Usage I Disable Status Bar I Disable Tool Bar IT Disable Title Bar I Disable Soft Buttons Mouse Cursor Style I Beam sl IT Disable Clipboard Accelerators lt Back Cancel Make the relevant selections if required then click Next to display the Aux Port Settings dialog box 11 The Aux Port Settings dialog box enables you to specify a COM or LPT port for bidirectional output when in any DEC VT
267. racters When you have finished defining f key button strings press the F9 key to exit the menu To enable the new definitions and display the relevant functions on the buttons press the F10 key Note The host may reset the f key definitions to their default values if required by the application 9 15 HP 700 92 96 Emulation Character Display Attributes The HP 700 92 96 emulation incorporates various display attributes which can be enabled by host commands or from the keyboard by the user These attributes are listed in the table below When an attribute or set of attributes are enabled they affect all subsequently displayed characters until an end attribute command or another attribute command is received or the end of the line is reached Attributes remain at the display location where they were enabled and will not move when characters are inserted or deleted You can configure the f keys and buttons so that they will enable these attributes when pressed To do this display the User Key Definition menu by pressing the keys Shift F10 together Use the Tab or Shift Tab keys to position the cursor in the first field next to the number of the f key to be defined and press F2 until the letter L for Local is displayed Press Tab and type in the text that will appear in the display label for the key for example Under in the first field and Line in the second for Under Line Press Tab to move down to the next line Press F7
268. racters in the Command box lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt F4 gt Specifying Characters There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character For example the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries _027 Decimal value underscore character followed by a 3 digit number 033 Octal value backslash character followed by a 3 digit number u001B Unicode value backslash and u characters then unicode value AT Control key value represents the control key on the keyboard e Additional value for ESC The following backslash values can be used 6 72 Setup Menus u Unicode introducer r Carriage return n Line feed e Escape Note that as the and characters are used as value introducers to enter these as character values you need to precede them with a backslash character i e enter as and as The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value u20ac 6 73 Setup Menus Mouse Button Actions Left Right Edit Copy X Shit cusorseet gt eire Control action Hotspot sl unassined Control Shift Show Hotspots x Unassigned x Ml tovecuse IE sedkenod R Double Cick Select Word 9 Test sl bk Highlight When Actioned eeng This dialog box is displayed by selecting Mouse Button Actions in the Settings menu This enables you to specify the function of the left and right mouse buttons when they are clicked
269. ractive Edit j Edit Key Acti ea Sec M Clear Unprotected I diat e ei CS IT Attributes Cleared D eier IT Protect From Host o This dialog box is displayed by selecting Local Editing in the Settings menu Edit Operation Factory default Unavailable The setting of this option determines whether Local Editing mode can be selected and how editing is performed Selecting Unavailable will prevent you or the host from entering Edit mode Selecting Edit will cause text to be stored in page memory so that it can be edited locally This enables the host to get on with other tasks A block of data will be transmitted to the host when the Enter key is pressed Selecting Interactive will cause characters to be sent to the host as soon as they are typed at the keyboard The host will perform editing functions Edit Key Action Factory default Immediate When this option is set to Immediate Edit mode will be entered immediately when the Shift Delete key combination is pressed without waiting for the host to send the command to enter When set to Deferred pressing Shift Delete will cause a code to be sent to the host asking permission to enter Edit mode The host will reply by sending the Enter Edit Mode command Clear Unprotected Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines which characters can be erased by the host or user When selected only unprotected characters can be erased protected char
270. reen i e the screen currently containing the cursor and split screen host screen and Notice Board mode The Zoom Settings options in the Notice Board Setup dialog box determine which screen is displayed above the other When viewing the display pointers at each end of the dividing line between the two screens indicate which is the host screen Key Functions The keys used by default for Notice Board functions are shown below together with the equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key on the keyboard 101 102 Key Keyboard Virtual Key Names NB Setup Alt F2 IB_NB_SETUP Zoom Alt Page Up IB_NB_ZOOM Jump Ctrl Page Up IB_NB_JUMP NB Copy Ctrl Shift Page Up IB_NB_COPY Copy Shift Page Down IB_COPY Copying Screen Data To The Display 1 Position the text cursor at the start of the area to be copied 2 Press the Copy key to start the Copy function Note that the status line will display the key functions available 3 Use the cursor keys to move the text cursor to the diagonally opposite corner of the display area to be copied The currently selected area will be highlighted in green Note that you can toggle the position of the text cursor between the two diagonally opposite corners of the selected area by pressing the Return key 10 15 IBM 3270 Emulation 4 Press F13 to copy the selected area The copied area i e the target will be highlighted in red Use the curs
271. rent terminal emulation The following description applies when running any of the DEC VT terminal emulations though some of the fields and buttons will be applicable to other emulations as well 2 28 Getting Started Local Pause VT500 7 Bit 1 1 001 001 Overstrike Mode Printer Ready Aux Ready 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Item 1 This displays two LEDs The first LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host It will show red when not connected and green when you are connected The second LED indicates whether or not data is being sent to or from the host It will show dull green when there is no activity red when data is being sent to the host and bright green when data is being received from the host Item 2 This button enables you to switch between Local and Online mode The label indicates the mode you will switch to if the button is clicked Item 3 This button enables you to Pause or Resume scrolling data in the window The label indicates the action that will be taken if the button is clicked Item 4 Indicates the current terminal emulation Item 5 This displays the active session always 1 the current page number always 1 and the line column location of the text cursor Item 6 This indicates whether Overstrike Mode or Insert Mode is currently selected In Overstrike Mode default new characters will replace already existing characters at the cursor position When Insert Mode is selected
272. ria Germany 1142 SBCS EURO Denmark Norway 1143 SBCS EURO Finland Sweden 1144 SBCS EURO Italy 1145 SBCS EURO Spain Latin America 1146 SBCS EURO UK 1147 SBCS EURO France 1148 SBCS EURO Belgium Canada Switzerland 1149 SBCS EURO Icelandic B 32 Host Command Summary Host Command Summary This appendix lists the host commands that are valid in each terminal emulation mode Additional special commands are listed at the back The following conventions are used in this command list Spaces in a command are for clarity only and are not to be entered as part of the command A space character that is part of the command will be shown as SP An asterisk in a command indicates the location of one or more parameters except otherwise indicated next to the command Note that IBM 3270 and IBM 5250 emulation commands are not included because of their complexity Refer to the manuals supplied with these terminals for the host commands that are supported VT52 Emulation CHARACTER SET SELECTION Invoke GO character set Invoke G1 character set Select GO character set Select Line Drawing character set CURSOR SI SO ESCG ESCF Direct cursor addressing 1 to 96 SP to DEL Insert FF character amp advance cursor Line feed Move cursor down one line Move cursor down one line Move cursor home Move cursor one column left Move cursor one column left Move
273. rminal modes unless indicated otherwise SINGLE BYTE CONTROLS Bell BEL Backspace BS Horizontal tab HT Linefeed LF Vertical tab VT Form feed FF Carriage return CR Shift out SO Shift in SI Device control 1 DC Device control 3 DC3 Cancel CAN Substitute SUB Escape ESC CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES Assign attribute s to following characters ESC m Normal 0 Bold 1 Underscore 4 Blink appears bold 5 Reverse 7 Invisible HFT 8 Foreground colours HFT 30 37 Background colours HFT 40 47 Foreground colours HFT 90 97 Background colours HFT 100 107 CHARACTER SET SELECTION United Kingdom character set GO VT100 ESC A United Kingdom character set G1 VT100 ESC A United Kingdom character set G2 VT100 ESC A United Kingdom character set G3 VT100 ESC A ASCII USASCI character set GO VT100 ESC B ASCII USASCII character set G1 VT100 ESC B ASCII USASCII character set G2 VT100 ESC B ASCII USASCII character set G3 VT100 ESC B Special graphics character set GO VT100 ESC 0 Special graphics character set G1 VT 100 ESC 0 Special graphics character set G2 VT100 ESC 0 Special graphics character set G3 VT 100 ESC 0 Single shift G2 VT100 ESCN Single shift G3 VT100 ESCO C 15 Host Command Summary Set GO character set HFT ESC lt Set G1 character set HFT ESC lt Lock shift G2 VT100 ESCn Lock shift G3 VT100 ESC o CURSOR Clear tab stop ESC g Clear horiz
274. rminal ID DEC VT 6 19 HP 6 24 IBM 3151 6 29 Terminal Reset 6 7 Terminal Settings 6 50 Terms amp Conventions 1 2 TN3270 Options 2 12 TN5250 Options 2 14 Toolbar Adding buttons 5 3 Assigning functions 5 4 Predefined button tools 5 1 Redefining 5 3 Removing buttons 5 5 Using 5 1 Window element 2 28 TVI 955 Emulation Host command summary C 36 Specification D 6 Index 7 Index Virtual key names A 7 U Unicode Entering values in Setup entries 6 4 Unisys T27 Emulation Specification D 6 V Virtual Key Names A 1 DG 410 412 emulation A 2 HP 700 92 96 emulation A 3 IBM 3270 emulation A 4 IBM 5250 emulation A 5 IBM 5250 Word Processing A 5 SCO Console emulation A 6 Standard A 1 TA6530 emulation A 6 TVI 955 emulation A 7 VT500 emulation A 2 Wyseemulation A 7 VT100 Emulation Host command summary C 2 Session configuration 7 1 VT400 Emulation Host command summary C 6 VT420 Emulation Host command summary C 12 VT500 Emulation Keyboard mapping 7 5 Session configuration 7 1 Virtual key names A 2 VT510 Emulation Host command summary C 9 VT52 Emulation Host command summary C 1 Session configuration 7 1 W Window Elements Menu bar 2 27 Soft Buttons 2 28 Toolbar 2 28 Wyse 60 Native Emulation Specification D 6 Wyse Emulations Character sets Native Mode ALL B 14 WY 60 Graphics 1 B 20 WY 60 Graphics 2 B 21 WY 60 Graphics 3 B 22 WY 60 Multinational 437 B 15 WY 60 Multinational 850 B
275. rs EasyScroll Zoom These are displayed if the image is larger than the screen area allocated to it IBM term for scrolling by dragging the image with the mouse Enables you to highlight an area of the image to magnify it so that it fills the allocated space the aspect ratio is preserved Additional functions such as rotation and colouring are controlled by the host 11 11 IBM 5250 Emulation Notes 11 12 IBM 3151 Emulation 12 IBM 3151 Emulation This chapter describes features of the IBM 3151 terminal emulation Introduction The IBM 3151 emulation is based on the native mode of the IBM 3151 Model 11 terminal The emulation is configured using the IBM 3151 Settings dialog box which is described in the Setup Menus chapter The display is set to 24 rows by 80 columns by default but you can select one of four display formats from the IBM 3151 Settings dialog box 24 rows x 80 columns 25 rows x 80 columns 24 rows x 132 columns 25 rows x 132 columns Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box 2 Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Co
276. rtual Key Names Key Function Alternate Code Page Attention Back Tab Backspace Clear Close Delete Space Copy Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Cursor Select Cursor Up Cursor Flash On Off Cursor Line Block Delay 1 Second Delete Character Delete Word Duplicate Enter Erase End Of Field Erase Input F1 F24 Field Mark Fn Edit Go To End Of Line Home Insert Mode Virtual Key Name IB_ALTCP IB_ATTN IB_BACKTAB IB_BACKSPACE IB_CLEAR IB_REV_CL IB_COPY IB_DOWN IB_LEFT IB_RIGHT IB_CURSORSEL IB_UP IB_FLCR IB_ALTCR IB_DELAY IB_DELCHAR IB_DELWORD IB_DUP IB_ENTER IB_ERASEEOF IB_ERASEINPUT IB_F1 IB_F24 IB_FIELDMARK IB_FEDIT IB_GO_EOL IB_HOME IB_INSERT Key Function Local National Map M Slot Reader Start M Slot Reader Send Mono Case New Line Next Word Notice Board Copy Notice Board Jump Notice Board Setup Notice Board Zoom Num Lock PAI PA3 Pause Play Keystrokes Previous Word Print Screen Push Mode On Off Quit Record Keystrokes Reset Return Rev Input Direction Reverse Screen Rule Display Selectable Field Tab System Request Tab Virtual Key Name IB_LCLMAP IB_MSRATTRIB IB_OPIDRDR IB_MONO IB_NEWLINE IB_NEXTWORD IB_NB_COPY IB_NB_JUMP IB_NB_SETUP IB_NB_ZOOM IB_NUMLOCK IB_PAI IB_PA3 IB_PAUSE IB_PLAY IB_PREVWORD IB_PRINT IB_PUSH IB_QUIT IB_RECORD IB_RESET IB_RETURN IB_REV_IP IB_REV_SC IB_RULE IB_FIELDTAB IB_SYSREQ IB_TAB A 4 Vir
277. s 9 4 IBM 3151 functions 12 5 IBM 3270 functions 10 11 IBM 5250 functions 11 7 TA6530 functions 13 6 Wyse functions 14 6 Entering control characters B 1 Keypad mode 6 54 Macros 3 1 6 68 Mapping 3 1 Mapping changing 6 68 Mapping showing 6 68 Send scan codes PC Term 6 55 Virtual key names A 1 Keywords 4 3 L Language Selection 2 1 6 15 Line Styles Colour selection 6 63 LocalEcho 2 20 6 48 Local Editing Settings 6 57 Local On Line Setting 6 48 Macros 3 1 6 68 Menu Bar 2 27 Middle Button 4 3 Mouse Button tools 6 76 Middle button emulating 4 3 Mouse Functions 6 74 Action hotspots 4 3 Default 4 1 Move text cursor 4 2 Selectrectangle 4 2 Selecting text for copy 4 2 Send keyword 4 3 Show hotspots 4 3 Multinational Character Set 6 52 N Network New Connection dialog box 6 8 New Connection Dialog Box 6 8 Notice Board Setup settings 6 41 O On Line Local Setting 6 48 Operating Language 2 1 6 15 P Parity Selection 2 19 6 47 Print Auto 6 13 Buffer 6 13 Cancel 6 13 Screen 6 13 Index 5 Index Printer Port Settings Connection Wizard 2 23 Printer Setup 6 11 Product Specification D 1 R Registry Commands Action on host connection close 15 5 Convert to MDIS P9 15 18 Disablebell 15 7 Disable close window menu item 15 11 Disable colour palette 15 16 Disable Command bar 15 12 Disable Edit menu 15 14 Disable Edit menu items 15 14 Disable Exit box 15 6 Dis
278. s dialog box for redefining the toolbar Displays information on this version of the terminal emulation The Toolbar Redefining The Toolbar Clicking the last button in the default toolbar or selecting Button Tools from the Settings menu will display a dialog box which enables you to redefine the toolbar Button Tools Current Tool New Connection e Delete Current Buttons Commands Insert at Current a Add Custom Print Buffer Print Screen DEEN Printer Setup Replay File Vi Reset Terminal a M visible Save Session Save Session As eg 5 xl Select All sl E The maximum number of buttons that can be displayed in the toolbar depends on the display resolution and the size of the window A button tool is defined in two stages The first stage is to specify the button bitmap for display in the toolbar and the second stage is to assign a function to it Adding Button Bitmaps Clicking the arrow button in the Current Tool box will display a list box showing all the button bitmaps in the order displayed in the toolbar together with their functions The Current Tool will be highlighted in this list When you add a new button to the toolbar it is positioned to the left of the button currently selected in this list Select the current tool then close the list box by clicking the arrow button again To add a new button select a button bitmap from the Buttons list box then click the
279. s dialog box is set to National and the system is configured for the relevant language Keyboard Configuration COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES feminine ordinal indicator a o A_ double open angle brackets lt lt RS quotation mark space number sign ES apostrophe space commercial at aao AA Multinational aa or AA or aA D A Multinational section Soo SO or s sign S or SOo SO National amp Multinational National includes SO or SO National VE opening bracket back slash II ole EH closing bracket accent Space R grave accent space GEI opening brace 8 Ex vertical line A closing brace tilde space Ea inverted E e cent sign el Ge i K pound sign l _ pa l eer e Ea currency sign o Ge xe copyright sign co G V degree sign gree Sign space National plus or 8 minus sign t superscript 2 2A superscript 3 34 rare uor U micro sign in order paragraph sign p orP centred period Ve superscript 1 1 masculine ordinal indicator Per H double closed angle brackets ZS fraction 14 one quarter in order fraction 12 one half in order fraction three 34 quarters Dutch in order d fl Florin Dutch in order i j sign Dutch in order inverted 2 Agrave A A acute A A circumflex A A tilde A 3 6
280. s enables you to specify the function of the left and right mouse buttons when they are clicked on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys You can assign up to six functions toeach button either entering your own definition in the same format as described for keyboard macros and soft buttons or selecting from a list of standard built in functions Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a drop down list box which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned Unassigned Send CR Select Send Keyword Extend Selection Middle Button Edit Copy Select Rectangle Edit Paste Select Word Show Hotspots Select and Copy Action Hotspot Cursor Select Move Cursor Rectangular Select and Copy The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked Selecting amp Copying Text You can use the mouse buttons to copy and paste text The region of the display that will be selected for copying depends on whether you use the Select Select and Copy Select Rectangle Rectangular Select and Copy or Select Word function The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position working left to right across the entire width of the display whereas the Select Rectangle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined by the start position top left corner and the finish p
281. s that were created using the Save Session As dialog box The descriptive name of the connection template currently in use is highlighted The factory default connection template is Untitled Clicking one of the descriptions then the OK button will cause the dialog box to close and the connection template associated with the chosen description will be actioned You can specify a particular connection template to use by default by clicking the required description then clicking the Save As Default button To delete a connection template select the description then click the Delete button Setup Menus Menu Descriptions The following pages describe the options available in all the menus and associated dialog boxes The descriptions begin by showing the menu or dialog box as it is displayed on the screen The factory default setting is shown below each option title where applicable File Menu Factory Default Reset Terminal New Connection Open Session Save Session Save Session As Printer Setup Print Screen Print Buffer Auto Print Eject Page Exit Factory Default This will restore the factory default settings of all the setup options A message box will be displayed asking you to confirm whether or not you want to assert the factory default settings Click the OK button to assert the factory defaults Confirm Factory Default E Confirm Factory Default Cancel Reset Terminal T
282. s the terminal model being emulated in response to a terminal identification request from the host Model 11 supports only one viewport containing 24 or 25 rows and 80 columns Model 31 supports up to three viewports 80 or 132 columns wide and pass through printing IBM 3270 Options The setting of the IBM 3270 Model option specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported TN3287 printing is supported by selecting 3287 1 One of four display sizes can be selected 3278 9 2 24 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 3 32 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 4 43 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 5 27 rows by 132 columns 3278 settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended attributes these are supported by the 3279 as standard 3270 Field Attributes Extended Highlighting Foreground Colour Query Reply Inbound Structured Fields The setting of the Left Ctrl acts as Reset Key option determines whether or not the left Control key performs the same function as the Reset key The setting of the Right Ctrl acts as Enter Key option determines whether or not the right Control key performs the same function as the keypad Enter key IBM 5250 Options The IBM 5250 Model option specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the specified terminal Getti
283. separate from it and you do not need to enable Block mode before using the Modify All function Block Mode F3 Data may be transmitted to the host a character at a time or as a block of characters The F3 key and equivalent button toggles the form of data transmission between Character mode and Block mode The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu The emulation is in Character mode when the button does not display an asterisk Each character will be sent to the host as it is entered at the keyboard When Block mode is activated as indicated by an asterisk data entered at the keyboard will not be sent to the host until the Enter key is pressed In this mode displayed text may be edited locally before it is transmitted to the host Control codes such as CR carriage return and LF line feed are acted upon locally and are not transmitted to the host when Enter is pressed Remote Mode F4 The current setting of this button determines whether pressing an alphanumeric key causes a character to be sent to the host remote or only to the display local The button and F4 key toggles between Remote mode and Local mode The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu The emulation is in Local mode when the button does not display an asterisk Pressing alphanumeric keys will cause characters to be sent to the display only When Remote mode is activated as indicated by an asterisk pressing a
284. setting of these two options determine the type of handshaking used when blocks of data are transmitted to the host One of three types of handshake may be used 1 No handshake Blocks of data are sent immediately when the relevant transmit key is pressed 2 DC1 handshake Data is only sent to the host when the host sends an ASCII DC1 control code to request it 3 DC1 DC2 DC1 handshake The host sends an ASCI DC1 control code to which the emulator replies by sending a DC2 code if ready to transmit The host sends the DC1 code again to cause the data block to be transmitted 6 21 Setup Menus The type of handshake used for block transfers is determined by the type of block transfer to be performed the mode that the HP 700 92 96 emulation currently operating in character block line block page or modify mode and the setting of these two options The setting of these two options will have the following general effect InhHndShk only selected The DC1 DC2 DC1 handshake or no handshake will be used InhDC2 only selected The DC1 handshake or no handshake will be used InhHndShk and InhDC2 selected No handshake will be used Enq Ack Pacing Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether the Hewlett Packard ENQ ACK handshake is used or not When selected the host can send an ASCII ENQ enquiry control code at the end of transmission asking if the data has been processed to which the emul
285. splay memory until the line is deleted If the line has no start of text pointer data transmission will begin at the start column specified by this option The column range that can be specified is from 1 to 80 inclusive 9 11 HP 700 92 96 Emulation To change the current start column move the cursor to the new starting point and click this button or press the F1 key The start column will revert to that specified within setup when the emulation is reset or re entered Set Tab F2 This function enables tab stops to be defined To define a tab stop move the cursor to the column to contain the tab and click this button or press F2 Note Tab stops that do not lie within the left and right margins will be ignored when the Tab key is pressed All tab stops will be ignored when the emulation is in Format mode Clear Tab F3 This function enables an individual tab stop to be cleared To clear a tab stop move the cursor to the column containing it and click this button or press F3 Cir All Tabs F4 Clicking this button or pressing F4 will cause all defined tab stops to be cleared except the left margin which is an implicit tab stop Left Margin F5 This function enables you to define the left margin Margins determine the boundary for certain cursor movement commands such as carriage return and cursor home and insert character and delete character functions Data to the left of this margin will still be accessible T
286. st and leftmost field is used to display messages of up to 64 characters in length The second field displays the current operating status and will usually display at least one of the following status indicators ANSI The emulation is operating in ANSI mode BLOCK The emulation is operating in Block mode CNTRL Display controls mode activated In this mode received control codes will be displayed but not actioned CONV The emulation is operating in Conversational mode HOLD Hold screen is activated The emulation stops processing incoming data when the Ctrl S keys are pressed in ANSI mode To release the hold state and continue normal processing press Ctrl Q INS Insert mode is activated In Block mode keyboard entered characters are inserted at the cursor position without overwriting already existing characters LOCKED The keyboard has been temporarily locked by the application NUM Num lock is activated Num lock is toggled on and off by pressing the keys Alt Num Lock PROT Block Protect mode enabled Refer to the Block Mode section for details When the emulation detects an error the status line will be temporarily replaced by an error line which will display one of the following messages INVALID LANGUAGE SET REQUESTED You tried to use an invalid national character set INVALID DATA You tried to enter an invalid character in the current field when in Block protect mode 13 3 TA6530 Emulation Operating
287. st application program name report ESC s 12347 C 25 Host Command Summary IBM 3151 Emulation CHARACTER SET SELECTION Select GO SI Select G1 SO Select character set GO ESC lt set Select character set G1 ESC gt set CURSOR Backspace BS Carriage return new line or LTA CR Cursor down ESCB Cursor left ESCD Cursor right ESC C Cursor up ESCA Cursor home ESCH Index ESC SPM Insert cursor ESCZ Line feed VT Line feed or new line LF Line feed or erase input FF Next line ESCM Page down AID ESC B Reverse index ESC M Read cursor address ESC 5 Set buffer address Set cursor address ESC X row column ESC Y row column Reset buffer address mode ESC SPZ Tab HT Back tab ESC 2 Set column tab ESC 0 Clear column tab ESC 1 Clear all column tabs ESC SP 1 DISPLAY Clear all ESC L Clear page ESCL Create viewport ESC SP r Disable default field attribute ESC Disable field attribute visible renditions ESC Disable host protect ESC amp Disable OIA divide line ESC Disable host protect ESC amp Disable OIA divide line ESC Disable partition separate line ESC Disable read unprotected field ESC Display machine status ESC Enable default field attribute ESC Enable field attribute visible renditions ESC C 26 Host Command Summary Enable host protect Enable OIA divide line Enable read unprotected field Host message write Host message display Set characte
288. t To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details DG 410 412 Emulation Keyboard Mapping The illustration on the following page shows where DG 410 412 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the DG 410 412 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the DG virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box Key Functions Local Print The Local Print key is used to print the current window or initiate the Print Form operation You can print the contents of the current window starting with the row containing the cursor by pressing the Local Print key on its own Keyboard entered data will be ignored while the print is in progress You can abort the print operation by pressing the Local Print key again You can initiate the Print Form operation by holding down the Shift key then pressing Local Print This performs the same function as Local Print pressed on its own except that only data appearing at full intensity will be printed when protected text is disabl
289. t and end are interpreted as encoded ASCII For example 1BOA becomes ASCII 27 10 ESC LF 6 38 Setup Menus Selecting End on Non Hex enables you to specify the number of characters that make up the end sequence in the End Length box The bypass will then terminate as soon as a non hexadecimal character is received any character except in the range 0 through 9 and A through F followed by the end sequence Characters can be entered in several ways For example to specify the ASCII escape character you can enter either _027 u001B we 033 or even Al Font This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters The available settings depend on the fonts installed SBCS APL2 amp DBCS The Single Byte Character Set APL2 and Double Byte Character Set options enable you to change the settings used by default for the chosen language These should only be changed by the System Administrator If they have been changed and you wish to restore the default settings in this dialog box click the Default button The following table shows the default settings A list of IBM EBCDIC codepages supplied can be found at the end of the Character Sets appendix Note Double byte character sets may not be supported by this version of the emulator 6 39 Setup Menus Default Language Codepage amp Character Set Settings
290. t name and 3s will return the last three characters To automatically assign a new device name for each successive connection either enter dN after the name where N is a decimal value or xN where N is a hexadecimal value Each time the host requests the device name a counter will be incremented modulus N and substituted into the device name For example TEST d4 will give TEST1 on first connect TEST2 on second TEST3 on third TESTO on fourth TEST1 on fifth and so on TEST d100 will give TEST1 on first connect TEST2 on second TEST99 on 99th TESTO on 100th TEST1 on 101st and so on These values are preserved over power off so the first connection of any given power on may not be TEST1 Assume that the start point is random In addition there is a single counter for the unit so concurrent sessions will start from subsequent values For example if session one uses TEST1 then session two will use TEST2 Where a device name collision occurs i e the device name is already in use on the host the host will ask again for the device name during the same connection In this case TEST1 TEST2 may all be tried in one connection until the host accepts one 2 14 Getting Started or all possibilities have been tried In the latter case the same name is sent twice in succession to indicate to the host all names have been tried If concurrent 5250 sessions are started before a previous session has negotiated an ac
291. t time it is loaded display the File menu and select the Save Session option You can create multiple connection templates when the terminal is not in WBT mode any one of which can be selected for use The procedure is as follows 1 Inthe File menu select the Save Session As option to display the following dialog box Save Session As Save As File Name Dias Saved Items M Keyboard Macros IV Soft Buttons IV attributes IV Window Metrics IV Text Rows IV Buffer Rows M Connection IV Terminal Settings Gen 2 Inthe Saved Items box indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options 3 Inthe Save As File Name text box enter a descriptive name to enable it to be identified for future selection This description will be listed in the Open Session dialog box 4 Click the OK button to save the template settings If you specified a descriptive name that already exists a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing name with the new settings 6 5 Setup Menus Selecting A Connection Template The Open Session dialog box enables you to select a connection template to use when the terminal is not in WBT mode This is displayed by selecting Open Session in the File menu m Defined Sessions D Session El ave Gs Def Delete a The Defined Sessions list box displays the names of connection template
292. ta when the screen is full When set to Off you will not be able to perform an insert operation When set to Line you will be able to insert one or more lines using the Ins Ln key for example The contents of the current and all following lines will move down the number of lines inserted causing the lines originally at the bottom of the display to be discarded When set to Character you will be able to insert one or more characters in the current line Characters to the right of the cursor position will move along If the Auto Wrap option is set to No then characters originally at the end of the current line will be discarded If set to Yes characters on all following lines will move along forcing characters at the end of the last line to be discarded When set to Both the function of the Line and Character settings will be enabled Insert Character Factory default Space The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Insert key When set to Space a space character will be inserted after the current cursor position When set to Mode the emulation will enter Insert mode when the Insert key is pressed Tab Operation Factory default Field The setting of this option determines whether tab stops are according to field attribute characters or column tab definitions When set to Field tab stops in a formatted page are provided by field attribute characters Column tab definitions are ignored 6 27 Se
293. ted when shifted 1noAe7 pseogAey Ly p vueyug SUOUEIUIZ ask Initialization Commands 19 Initialization Commands This chapter describes all the initialization commands that can be included in the registry or on the command line to run the emulator Introduction This chapter describes the registry entries and command line options that can be used to specify how the emulator is initially run Registry entries for the emulator are read from a registry key under HKLM Software Pericom lt product name gt using Startup Default or Startup NAME where NAME is specified using the N command line option Command line options are used to modify the configuration of the emulator on start up They are entered after the name of the emulator and each option must be preceded by a space An option is immediately followed by its setting if one is required without a space in between The following section provides a summary of all the registry entries and command line options supported by the emulator This is followed by sections describing the commands in detail grouped according to their function 15 1 Initialization Commands Command Summary Note that indicates the command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator Host Connection Command Function Registry Entry Command Line Load Winsock on start up none LW Exit on connection close fail ExitOnClose on E No e
294. ter limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your terminal The Predefined Macros box enables you to select from a list of standard functions associated with the current terminal emulation Clicking the arrow button will display a list box in which the names of valid key functions called virtual key names are shown Note The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and associated virtual key names for each terminal emulation Note that a virtual key name will be sent across a network as a single packet whereas an escape sequence will be split into several packets If a required function has a virtual key name equivalent use this instead of the escape sequence A key definition may be actioned locally or transmitted to the host when the key or key combination is pressed This is determined by the setting of the Local check box When unchecked the definition will be transmitted to the host The Current Macro Definitions box displays the key and key combinations that are currently defined You can remove the selected definition or delete all the definitions by clicking the relevant Remove button Defining A Key Or Key Combination 1 Click in the Program Key box then press the key or key combination to define The current definition will be displayed 2 Click in the With box then enter the new definition or make a selection from the list of Predefined Macros then click Apply 3 Check the Local check box to
295. ters starting at cursor line ESC L Delete character at cursor position ESC W Delete characters starting at cursor position ESC P Delete current line amp replace with replacement characters ESCR Delete lines at cursor line amp replace with replacement characters ESC M Erase from cursor to end of line amp replace with replacement characters ESC T Erase line portion amp replace with replacement characters 0 from cursor to cursor 2 all unprotected ESC K Erase from cursor to end of line amp replace with null characters ESCt Erase from cursor to end of page amp replace with replacement characters ESC Y Erase page portion amp replace with replacement characters 0 from cursor to cursor 2 all unprotected ESC J Erase from cursor to end of page amp replace with null characters ESC y Clear current unprotected field replace with replacement characters CAN Clear all characters amp replace with null characters ESC 955 mode Clear all characters amp replace with replacement characters reset protect and write protect modes ESC 950 mode Clear unprotected characters amp replace with replacement characters do not reset protect and write protect modes ESC 955 mode Clear unprotected characters amp replace with write protected space characters reset protect mode ESC 950 mode Clear unprotected characters amp replace with write protected space characters do not reset protect mode ESC Clear unprotect
296. the Emulation Settings dialog box Set the Alpha Emulation option to IBM3270 then click OK The terminal will 10 2 IBM 3270 Emulation now be in Network Virtual Terminal mode Display the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box if you wish to change the setting of the IBM 3270 Model option which determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes are supported One of four display sizes can be selected 3278 9 2 24 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 3 32 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 4 43 rows by 80 columns 3278 9 5 27 rows by 132 columns Settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended at tributes 3270 field attributes extended highlighting blink flash and underscore but not in combination foreground colour and query reply inbound structured fields These attributes are also supported by the 3279 Click OK to close the dialog box Select Save Session in the File menu Select New Connection in the File menu to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial
297. the buttons and add or remove buttons from the toolbar using options in the Button Tools dialog box which is described later The Predefined Button Tools The toolbar displayed by default contains a series of buttons defined with functions found in the setup menus These functions are listed below and described in the Setup Menus chapter Gi Displays the New Connection dialog box for making a serial fala or network host connection Displays the Open Session dialog box This enables you to load a particular setup configuration The Toolbar SAE Ue owe Displays the Save Session As dialog box This enables you to specify how the current session configuration is to be saved Copies selected data to the clipboard Pastes clipboard data at the current cursor position Displays the Printer Setup dialog box This enables you to select any printer that is configured in Microsoft Windows Will produce a hardcopy of screen data Displays the Attributes dialog box This enables you to specify the colours used in the emulation workspace and how text with attributes is displayed Displays the Keyboard Macros dialog box This shows the mapping of your keyboard and enables you to redefine the function of keys Displays the Soft Buttons dialog box for defining the function of soft buttons Displays the Mouse Button Actions dialog box for assigning up to six functions to the left mouse button Displays the Button Tool
298. the copy and paste function of the mouse buttons to prevent accidental editing This can be achieved by using one of these commands When the editing functions are disabled use the Edit menu options or the numeric keypad keys Shift i e Del to copy and Shift 0 i e Ins to paste instead 15 18 Virtual Key Names Virtual Key Names This appendix lists all the supported virtual key names which enable you to include a specific key function in a user definition Standard Virtual Key Names Key Function 0 9 A Z Alt right Apps Apostrophe Backspace Break Clear Comma Compose Character Control left Control right Copy Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Cursor Up Data Talk Delete End Equal Escape Euro Sign Execute Exit Emulator Fl F12 Help Hold Screen Home Hyphen Insert Virtual Key Name VK_0 VK_9 VK_A VK_Z VK_RALT VK_APPS VK_APOSTROPHE VK_BACK VK_BREAK VK_CLEAR VK_COMMA VK_COMPOSE VK_CONTROL VK_RCONTROL VK_COPY VK_DOWN VK_LEFT VK_RIGHT VK_UP VK_DATATALK VK_DELETE VK_END VK_EQUAL VK_ESCAPE VK_EUROSIGN VK_EXECUTE VK_EXIT VK_F1 VK_F12 VK_HELP VK_HOLDSCREEN VK_HOME VK_HYPHEN VK_INSERT Key Function Keypad 0 9 Keypad Add Keypad Divide Keypad Decimal Keypad Multiply Keypad Subtract Num Lock Off C 1 102 key kbd Page Down Page Up Paste Pause Period Print Print Screen Quote back Return Scroll Lock Se
299. the host by an inactivity timeout 2 10 Getting Started Suppress Echo When selected this will will prevent the emulator from generating the Telnet echo option on connection Suppress 3270 Regime When running the IBM 3270 emulation the setting of this option determines whether or not support for the Telnet 3270 regime option is suppressed Suppress TN3270E When running the IBM 3270 emulation the setting of this option determines whether or not support of TN3270E is suppressed When this option is not selected i e TN3270E is not suppressed additional options are available by clicking the 3270 Options button These are described in the TN3270 Options section Suppress TN5250E When running the IBM 5250 emulation the setting of this option determines whether or not support of TN5250E is suppressed When this option is not selected i e TN5250E is not suppressed additional options are available by clicking the 5250 Options button These are described in the TN5250 Options section Force Negotiation These settings determine whether or not the Telnet Binary or EOR options are sup ported Both are set to no by default No Will not force any negotiations It will leave it up to the host to decide what to do DO Will force negotiation The host will be informed that the option is supported DONT Will force negotiation A negotiation packet will be sent to the host telling it that the option is not supported
300. the host it normally results in a line feed on the display in HP 700 92 96 mode Selecting this option will cause the emulator to ignore all form feed commands received from the host Return Def Factory default M i e CR This enables you to define the function of the Return key Up to two characters may be used to define the key If a second character is a space it will be ignored To change the current definition delete the definition displayed in the text box and type in the new one either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character For example the default code for the Return key function CR carriage return can be entered by typing the characters and M representing the keys Ctrl M which when pressed together would generate the CR code Decimal values are entered as three digit numbers immediately preceded by an underscore character Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero For example the decimal value of CR is 13 so this would be entered as _013 Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references Start Column Factory default 1 This text box is used to specify the start column for transmitted data when no logical start of text pointer is present and the Return or Enter keys are pressed in Modify Line or Modify All mode Usually a start of text pointer is automatically generated to designate the leftmost character
301. the next key definition If you do not wish to save the definition press Ctrl Shift Esc instead of Enter Note that the function keys can store a maximum of 128 characters between them When this number is reached or exceeded field A will start blinking and any characters following the 128th character will be discarded 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until you have finished defining function keys 6 To exit from the function key menu press Ctrl Shift Esc 12 6 TA6530 Emulation 13 TA6530 Emulation This chapter describes features of the Tandem 6530 terminal emulation Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the TA6530 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then cli
302. the screen into protected and nonprotected areas called fields The cursor cannot be moved into protected fields which may contain prompts or information or be empty The cursor can only be moved into unprotected fields which may also define the type of characters that can be entered In Block mode display memory is divided into pages the number of pages being determined by the application The status line will display BLOCK when you are in Block mode and PROT when in Block Protect mode 13 4 TA6530 Emulation ANSI Mode In ANSI mode characters are sent to the host as you type them and standard ANSI American National Standard Institute functions are executed Applications that run on the LXN host system generally recognize and use these functions The status line will display ANSI when you are in ANSI mode The Rule Cursor A cross hair rule cursor can be displayed by pressing the keys Alt Page Up To return to the normal cursor press Alt Page Down Keyboard Mapping The following illustration shows where TA6530 keyboard functions are mapped to keys on the 101 102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout Special key functions that are provided on the TA6530 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the TA virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box 13 5 9 1 PRINT ERGE RESET e FS D ie
303. the text box and enter a different terminal identity Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported National Factory default Unselected This will only be available if the system is configured for a language that supports national replacement character sets The setting of this option determines the type of character set used to generate characters When selected a character set specific to the selected keyboard nationality is used When unselected default the emulator is in Multinational mode a character set consisting of two tables of characters is used This enables characters from any keyboard nationality to be generated Tertiary Device Attribute When the emulator is in VT420 mode Emulation set to VT500 and Terminal ID set to VT420 this option enables you to specify the tertiary device attribute report that is sent in response to a request from the host Answerback String This option enables you to specify the Answerback string that is sent to the host in response to an ANSI mode enquiry command The string may be up to 30 characters long Answerback Concealed Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause the Answerback string specified in the text box above to be locked from change and displayed as asterisks Note that deselecting this option will cause the Answerback string to be deleted 6 19 Setup Menus HP 700 92 96 Settings Terminal ID air Pages O
304. ther or not an audible warning sounds when the cursor reaches a specified column The default bell column number is 72 in 80 column mode and 124 in 132 column mode Enhance Factory default Selected When this option is selected the emulator will recognize an additional set of Wyse codes which are not normally supported by specific non Wyse terminals Answerback Mode Factory default Unselected This option applies to all emulations and specifies whether or not an answerback message is automatically sent to the host in response to an ASCII ENQ character 6 33 Setup Menus Send ACK Factory default Selected This option applies to all emulations and specifies whether or not an ASCII ACK character is sent to the host port after certain commands have been executed Block Mode Factory default Unselected This option applies to all emulations In Block mode keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host When Block mode is disabled data is sent to the host as it is entered at the keyboard Colour Support Factory default Unselected When this option is selected an additional set of host commands will be recognized to determine the colours used for the display Wyse 350 colour commands will be recognized in all modes except Wyse 60 which will use Wyse 60 colour commands Application Key Mode Factory default Unselected When application key mo
305. ting a session configuration when the terminal is not in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter 1 Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation to display the Emulation Settings dialog box Select the IBM 3151 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to display the New Connection dialog box Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box For a TCP IP connection select TCP IP enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 12 2 IBM 3151 Emulation For a serial connection select Serial specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Configure for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details 5 When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box click the Connect button to make the connection Note You can save these settings as a connection template using the Save Session As dialog box Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details The Status Bar The status bar along the bottom of the display shows the status of various operations Pause IBM 3151 1 1 001 001 ECHO HOLD SCREEN Printer Re
306. tings These options are described in the Serial Settings section Configuration of COM1 r Baud Rate Data Bits ERE e l r Parity r Stop Bits Cancel None e 1 e eme r Elow Control Input he Direct Print Data To A Network Printer To direct print data to a printer on the network select Use Network Printer LPR and enter the LPD Hostname Clicking the Setup button will display a dialog box which enables you to specify various print settings Network Printer LPR Options x LPD Device ee Printer Name a Job Name Ea User Name f Number of Copies hr Retries po Retry Delay jo Secs T Add Banner T Debug Information Cancel Setup Menus You must specify the Printer Name The Job Name and User Name entries are optional the User Name will default to root if none is specified You can specify how many times the LPR protocol will attempt to execute the print job before cancelling by setting the number of Retries and the number of seconds delay between each attempt When Add Banner is selected information about this print job will be printed with it You can display a message box which will indicate the progress of the print job by selecting Debug Information Print Screen This will perform a print screen Print Buffer This will send a copy of all the data contained in the window buffer to the currently selected printer Auto Print This toggles auto print mode on and off as i
307. tion of various operating modes and display configurations Clicking a button has the same effect as pressing the equivalent F key When a key or button is attributed an on off toggle action the button will display an asterisk when the function is selected The middle button displays the row and column position of the cursor It has no other function On entering HP 700 92 96 mode the buttons and function keys enable various operating modes to be selected The buttons will show the Mode Selection configu ration Mode Selection Line Modify Block Renote 1 1 Terninal Menory Display Auto Modify All Node Node Test Lock Functns LF The Mode Selection functions are displayed when the HP 700 92 96 emulation is first entered If the functions are changed while using the emulation you can redisplay the Modes menu by pressing the F9 key the equivalent of the HP 700 92 96 User System key then F4 Line Modify F1 This function enables you to edit and retransmit an incorrectly entered command string when the emulation is in Remote mode and Character mode and you are com municating interactively with the host This saves you having to retype the entire string again Note This will not function when the emulation is in Block or Format mode When the host causes an error message to be displayed indicating that the string has been incorrectly entered press the F1 key or click the equivalent button An asterisk will appear on the bu
308. to Don t Report Transform Specifies whether the printer will use the host print transform function to generate ASCII printer data This is always set to Yes The Mfg Type and Model option must specify the printer manufacturer type and model Mfg Type and Model Specifies the manufacturer type and model of the printer The entry must exactly match an AS400 printer type string including the asterisk character The following valid entries are for the IBM AS 400 V3R1 Note that the list can change according to AS 400 settings IBM2380 IBM2381 IBM2390 IBM2391 IBM3812 IBM3816 IBM3912HP IBM3916HP IBM39302 IBM39303 IBM4019 IBM4019HP IBM4029 IBM4029HP IBM4037 IBM4039HP IBM4070 IBM4070EP IBM4072 IBM4076 IBM42011 IBM42012 IBM42013 IBM42021 IBM42022 2 16 Getting Started 1BM42023 1BM4212 1BM47121 IBM5152 IBM6404 IBM6412EP HPIHID HP500 CPQPM15 EPAP5500 EPFX1170 EPLQ870 EPSQ1170 NECP2200XE OKI184IBM OKI393IBM OKI810 PAN1124IEP PAN1654EP PAN2624EP PAN4451HP MSGQ Name IBM42071 IBM4216 IBM47122 IBM5201 IBM6404EP HPII HPHIP HP520 CPQPM20 EPDFX5000 EPLX810 EPLQ1070 EPEPL7000 NECP5200 OKI320IBM OKIS9OIBM OKI820 PANI180EP PAN1695EP PAN4410HP 1BM42072 IBM4226 IBM47221 IBM5202 IBM6408 HPIID HPIISI HP550C EPAP2250 EPDEX8000 EPLQ510 EPLQ1170 EPEPL8000 NECP5300 OKI321IBM OKIS9 IBM OKI3410 PANI180IEP PA
309. ton to action the change The toolbar will not be updated until you click the OK button to close the dialog box Removing Button Tools You can remove individual button tools from the toolbar or you can remove the entire toolbar from the display A button tool is removed by selecting it in the Current Tool list box then clicking the Delete Current button To remove the toolbar from the display deselect the Visible check box 6 77 Setup Menus Notes 6 78 DEC VT Emulations DEC VT Emulations This chapter describes features of the DEC VT terminal emulations Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the DEC VT terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively The VT500 7 Bit and VT500 8 Bit emulations enable you to r
310. ton or press F6 The right margin can be reset to column 80 by pressing F7 this will also reset the left margin to column 1 Note Margins are disregarded when data is transferred from display memory to the host The margins will be cleared when Format mode is enabled Cir All Margins F7 This function will reset both left and right margin settings so that the left margin is in column 1 and the right margin in column 80 Key Programming The keys F1 through F8 and their equivalent buttons can be programmed by the host or user to perform additional functions to those described in the previous section The keys may be assigned a string of alphanumeric characters and or control codes and you can define whether the key string is executed locally or transmitted to the host or both The buttons can also be programmed to display the new functions when in User Keys mode User Keys mode is entered by pressing the F10 key The f key buttons displayed on the screen will change to display the current User Key definitions If no definitions have been assigned either by you or the host the buttons will just display the legends of each f key as shown below To define the function of an f key or equivalent button locally press the keys Shift F10 to display the User Key Definition menu as shown overleaf The menu can be exited by pressing F9 Default Definitions While this menu is displayed the f keys and equivalent buttons have the functio
311. tory default Unselected When this option is selected characters with the inverse attribute will have the text foreground colour swapped with that of the text cell background AutoColour Factory default Unselected This option is only applicable to the DEC VT terminal emulations When selected displayed characters are colour coded according to type For example all numeric characters are displayed in one colour while all alphabetic characters are displayed in another Deselecting this option will display characters according to the settings in this dialog box Ansi Colours Disabled Factory default Unselected Selecting this option will cause ANSI colour commands to be ignored Colours Cleared With Attributes Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines whether or not the foreground and background colours are cleared to the default colours when an ANSI clear attributes command is received Attributes Use Normal BG Factory default Unselected This option only applies to the IBM 3270 emulation If attribute indicators take up character positions on the screen you can force those positions to display the normal background colour instead of the attributes by selecting this option 6 65 Setup Menus Customizing The Colour Selection You can change any of the 16 colours displayed in the Foreground and Background colour palettes To do this select the colour you wish to change in one of the palettes
312. tting determines whether or not the server is allowed to send the SNA Bind image and Unbind notification to the emulator When Responses is selected positive and negative response handling is supported It allows the server to reflect to the emulator any and all definite exception and no response requests sent by the host application When SysRegq is selected some or all depending on the server of the functions of the SysReq key will be emulated and the server in an SNA environment The LU1 and LU3 Printer options are available when the IBM 3270 Model option is set to 3287 1 a printer They enable you to specify which printer type s to support 2 13 Getting Started TN5250 Options Environment Device Name Library User Menu Password Program oe This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 5250 Options button in the TCP IP Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN5250 is not suppressed and the IBM 5250 Model is not set to a printer Refer to the next section for 5250 Printer Options Device Name This enables you to enter the name of the device which the server will be requested to assign to this Telnet session You can return the local host name by entering s after the device name To return the user name enter u after the device name You can specify how many characters of the name is returned in each case For example 3s will return the first three characters of the local hos
313. tton indicating that the function is selected Move the cursor to the line containing the error edit the line then press Return or Enter This will cause the edited string to be transmitted and Line Modify mode to be exited If after activating Line Modify mode you wish to cancel it just press F1 or click the button again HP 700 92 96 Emulation Modify All F2 This is similar to the Line Modify F1 function described previously the only difference being that the editing mode is not exited when Return or Enter is pressed F2 and its equivalent button acts as a toggle key switching the mode on or off The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu The F2 Modify All key and button enables you to edit and retransmit an incorrectly entered command string when the emulation is in Character mode This saves you having to retype the entire string again Note This will not function when the emulation is in Block or Format mode When the host causes an error message to be displayed indicating that the string has been incorrectly entered press the F2 key An asterisk will appear on the button indicating that the function is selected Move the cursor to the line containing the error edit the line then press Return or Enter This will cause the edited string to be transmitted To exit Modify All mode press F2 or click the button again Note Even though this function is a special form of Block mode it is completely
314. tual Key Names IBM 5250 Virtual Key Names Key Function Alternate Code Page Attention Back Tab Backspace Backspace non dest Clear Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Cursor Fast Left Cursor Fast Right Cursor Select Cursor Up Delay 1 Second Delete Character Duplicate Enter Erase End Of Field Erase Input F1 F24 Field Exit Field Mark Field Minus Virtual Key Name AS_ALTCP AS_ATTN AS_BACKTAB AS_BACKSPACE AS_NONDESTBS AS_CLEAR AS_DOWN AS_LEFT AS_RIGHT AS_FASTLEFT AS_FASTRIGHT AS_CURSORSEL AS_UP AS_DELAY AS_DELCHAR AS_DUP AS_ENTER AS_ERASEEOF AS_ERASEINPUT AS_F1 AS_F24 AS_FIELDEXIT AS_FIELDMARK AS_FIELDMINUS Key Function Field Plus Go To End Of Line Help Home Insert Mode Monochrome New Line PAI PA Pause Play Keystrokes Print Local Print Push Mode On Off Quit Record Keystrokes Reset Roll Down Roll Up Rule Display System Request Tab Test IBM 5250 Word Processing Mode Key Function Begin Bold Begin Underline Word Underline End Attribute Centre Text Half Index Up Half Index Down Next Text Column Beginning of Line End of Line Virtual Key Name AS_WP_BOLD AS_WP_UNDERLINE AS_WP_WORD_UNDER AS_WP_END_ATTR AS_WP_CENTRE AS_WP_HI_UP AS_WP_HI_DOWN AS_WP_NEXT_COL AS_WP_BEG_LINE AS_WP_END_LINE Key Function Top of Page End of Page Start New Page Insert Carrier Return Insert Stop Code Find Stop Code Required Page End Required Spac
315. tup Menus When set to Column tab stops are provided by column tab definitions Field attribute characters are ignored Enter Key Factory default Return This option enables you to specify whether the Enter key performs the same function as the Return key or the Send key Return Key Factory default Field This option specifies whether or not the cursor can enter a line within a protected field when the Return key is pressed When set to Field the result of pressing the Return key is determined by the setting of the Auto New Line option and the cursor will move to the next unprotected line When set to New Line the result of pressing the Return key is determined by the setting of the Auto New Line option Send Operation Factory default Page The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Send and Send Line keys When set to Page the contents of the current page will be sent to the host when Send is pressed or the current line if Send Line is pressed When set to Line the contents of the current line will be sent to the host when Send is pressed or the current page if Send Line is pressed Auto Wrap Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines what happens to the cursor and data sent to the display when the end of the current line is reached When selected the cursor will automatically move to the beginning of the next line Note that this will always be the case in block mode
316. tus line if an error occurs during recording or playback 9001 9003 9007 9010 9015 Exceeded the maximum number of allowed keystrokes Remedy Press the Record key to exit Record mode To record a new keystroke sequence either a Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data then enter the new data b Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data then press the Delete key to erase the recorded data for that key You pressed an invalid Fn key while performing the Record or Play function Remedy Press the Reset key You pressed an invalid sequence key e g Play while performing the Record function Remedy Press the Reset key While performing the Play function you pressed an Fn key that does not have a keystroke assigned to it Remedy Press the Reset key In communication mode you pressed either the Quit or Pause key Remedy Press the Reset key 10 14 IBM 3270 Emulation 9019 In Record or Play mode While the Record play pause indicator was displayed on the status line you pressed an invalid key e g Play key in Record mode or Record key in Play mode Remedy Press the Reset key Notice Board Facility Introduction The Notice Board is an area of the display in which copied data can be stored and manipulated When the Notice Board is enabled see Notice Board Setup dialog box pressing the Zoom key will toggle the display between full sc
317. u could invoke the function by holding down the Alt key and clicking the mouse pointer on the displayed key name assuming default mouse configuration Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes A set of default hotspot keywords is provided for each mode These relate to key functions specific to the emulation For example in VT500 mode you can click on the word Help displayed on the screen and the emulator will execute the function associated with the Help key You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by using the Show Hotspots function All colour attributes will be temporarily removed from the display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red background Emulating Middle Mouse Button You can assign the function of the middle button found on a three button mouse to any button or button and key combination by using the Middle Button option Mouse Functions Notes 4 4 The Toolbar The Toolbar This chapter describes how to use and redefine the toolbar Using The Toolbar The toolbar displayed below the menu bar by default provides a quick way of actioning commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button FP E Ee Ee The toolbar contains a series of buttons with graphical representations of their functions These buttons are predefined with functions found in the setup menus and are described in the next section You can redefine all
318. ulation item Emulation off none Disable HP2392A item hp2392a off none Disable IBM 3151 item Ibm3151 off none Disable IBM 3270 item Ibm3270 off none Disable IBM5250 item Ibm5250 off none Disable Keyboard Macros item KeyboardMacros off none Disable Local Editing item LocalEditing off none Disable Mouse Buttons item MouseButtons off none Disable Serial item Serial oft none Disable Soft Buttons item SoftButtons off none Disable TA6526 item ta6526 off none Disable Terminal item Terminal off none Disable Unisys T27 item UnisysT27 off none Disable Wyse item Wyse off none Disable Tools menu ToolsMenu off MO 15 3 Initialization Commands Disable scroll bar ScrollBar off SB Soft button levels displayed ButtonLevels 0 4 BLO 4 Disable status bar amp DEC status StatusLine off V Disable colour palette UsePalette off SP Flashing characters in all sessions none FB Reflection 4 colour support iR4Colours 1 R4 Keyboard amp Mouse Command Function Registry Entry Command Line MDIS P9 emulation convert to MDCUK Yes none Disable all mouse edit functions MouseEdit oft ME1 Enable all mouse edit functions MouseEdit on ME2 Enable mouse highlighting only MouseEdit disabled MEO 15 4 Initialization Commands Host Connection Load Winsock On Start up Registry Entry None Command Line LW Default Setting Off This will
319. ulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals respectively Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for details The VT500 7 Bit and VT500 8 Bit emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT320 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT500 7 Bit is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT500 8 Bit leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT500 7 Bit Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for details The VT PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC Term mode supported by DEC This is the same as the VT510 emulation except that keyboard scan codes are sent on key press release instead of ASCII codes by default 6 18 Setup Menus The WYSE PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC Term personality supported by Wyse Keyboard scan codes are sent on key press release instead of ASCII codes by default The WY50 WY50 and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software designed to drive the Wyse WY 50 WY 50 and WY 60 terminals respectively Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for information on these emulations VT Terminal ID Factory default VT420 This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request You can either select from the list of IDs or you can edit
320. umn c ESC 1 cH Move cursor to line 1 column c ESC 1 c f Move cursor to next tab stop HT Move cursor up lines ESC A Reverse index cursor move up one line ESCM Select absolute origin mode ESC 61 Select auto carriage return ESC 20h Select relative origin mode ESC 6h Set tab stop at current cursor position ESCH Tab cursor backward tabs ESC Z Tab cursor forward tabs ESC I C 3 Host Command Summary DISPLAY Scroll display down lines ESC T Scroll display up lines ESC S Select 80 column display mode ESC 31 Select 132 column display mode ESC 3h Select invisible display ESC 751 Select normal colour display mode ESC 51 Select reverse colour display mode ESC 5h Select thin line graphics in ANSI BBS mode ESC 10m Select visible display ESC 75h Set top t and bottom b margin positions ESC t br EDITING Delete characters from cursor position right ESC P Delete lines from cursor position down ESC M Enable all characters to be erased ESC 6h Enable erasure of unprotected characters only ESC 61 End protected area ESC W Erase characters amp attributes from cursor right ESC X Erase line portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC K Erase screen portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC J Insert blank lines ESC L Insert space characters ESC Protect characters with attribute s ESC Select insert mode ESC 4h Select replace mode ESC 41 Start prote
321. umn one of next line ESCE Move cursor to column one amp down lines ESC E Move cursor to column one amp up lines ESC F Move cursor to column on current line ESC G Move cursor to line and column Se ESC 1 cH Move cursor tab stops ESC I Move cursor previous tab stops ESC Z Set clear tab stops ESC W Set horizontal tab ESCH or HTS C 34 Host Command Summary DISPLAY Insert spaces at cursor location Restore cursor position amp video attribute Save cursor position amp video attribute Set current line to single width 80 columns Set current line to double width 40 columns Scroll display down lines Scroll display up lines Set current video attributes Write to message field EDITING ESC ESC 8 ESC7 ESC 5 ESC 6 ESC T ESC S ESC m ESC P ESC Delete blank lines at cursor position ESC M Delete characters at cursor position ESC P Erase characters amp attributes at cursor ESC X Erase field ESC N Erase line portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC K Erase screen portion 0 from 1 to 2 all ESC J Insert blank lines at cursor position ESC L Repeat last character times ESC b GENERAL OPERATION Cancel current escape sequence CAN Execute self tests ESC y Reset emulation ESC c Set emulation configuration ESC P ESC Set mode ESC h Reset mode ESC 1 Sound bell BEL Read screen contents ESC 3 s yv Term
322. un applications written for the DEC VT320 terminal the difference is in their treatment of 8 bit control codes When VT500 7 Bit is selected all 8 bit codes are converted to their 7 bit equivalents whereas VT500 8 Bit leaves 8 bit codes unchanged If you are using VT200 applications select VT500 7 Bit Specify the required VT Terminal ID setting Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box For a TCP IP connection click the TCP IP button enter the name or internet address of the host computer in the Host Name box then click Advanced for DEC VT Emulations additional Telnet options Refer to the TCP IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details For a serial connection click the Serial button specify the communications port in the Connect To box then click Advanced for additional serial options Refer to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information dialog box then click Next The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are described in chapter 2 Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes Automate Login Process Printer Port Settings GUI Overrides Aux Port Settings When you have made your selections click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager In the Terminal Connection Manager display the Connections list select the session name you specified earl
323. vertical bar to the right When you have the required colour click the Add to Custom Colours button to apply the change to the set of custom colours Numeric Value Method The numeric value of Hue Lightness and Saturation or the Red Green and Blue percentage values can be entered directly in the text boxes The colour displayed in the Colour box will change accordingly When you have the required colour click the Add to Custom Colours button to apply the change to the set of custom colours 6 67 Setup Menus Define Keyboard Macros Define Keyboard Macros Create New Macro Current Macro Definitions Program Key Key Code LL Defined Mag with T Local Add gt Predefined Macros Apply hr CONTROL v lt Remove Remove All caei This dialog box is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings menu The Define Keyboard Macros dialog box enables you to redefine the function of most of the keys on your keyboard including the key combinations listed below Key Shift Key Control Key Control Shift Key Alt Key Alt Shift Key Alt Control Key Alt Control Shift Key Each definition may contain a string of up to 127 characters The combined total of all the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127 character limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC Note An escape sequence will be sent a
324. white plus attributes and colour Colours may be modified using the Attribute Settings dialog box This emulation can be used for connection to an IBM AS 400 System 36 or System 38 A typeahead capability is provided so that you can continue to enter data without waiting for a prompt from the host Session Configuration WBT Mode This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when the terminal is in WBT mode The options available are described in detail in chapter 2D 1 Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the Add button to display the New Connection dialog box Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK The Terminal Emulation Client Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog box will be displayed Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in the Connection Name box Select the IBM 5250 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box Specify the IBM 5250 Model This is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request Note that not all features of the terminal model may be supported This also allows you to specify whether the display is treated 11 1 IBM 5250 Emulation as monochrome green for normal characters white for intense attribute or colour for attributes The terminal models currently supported and their display character istics are listed below Model Display Rows
325. will begin immediately as indicated by a P on the status line All the recorded keystrokes will be played back automatically When playback is com pleted the P will disappear If the recorded keystrokes included Pause then playback will halt at that point to allow you to enter keystrokes manually Press Play to resume playback from where you stopped typing If you want to cancel during the playback operation press the Quit key Editing Macros 1 2 Press Alt F3 Press the Fn key containing the macro to be edited The status line will display information about the Fn key macro as follows is a Macro Item1 Displays EDIT or INSERT depending on the current mode Item2 Indicates the number of new keystrokes that may be stored Item3 Displays the current Fn key number Item4 Displays the cursor position within the macro i e the number of key strokes from the start of the macro Item5 Displays the contents of the macro 10 13 IBM 3270 Emulation 3 Use the Left or Right cursor keys to move the cursor one character position at a time through the macro or the Up or Down cursor keys to move 20 character positions at a time 4 Ifrequired press the Insert key to toggle between Insert and Edit mode as indicated in the status line 5 Make the required changes to the macro 6 To save the edit press Alt F3 7 Press Quit to exit Error Codes The following error codes may appear on the sta
326. ws Key1 Mod1 Function UDS UDS Direction Key2 Mod2 Function UDS UDS Direction S Key Is the key station number of the key to be programmed as listed below Esc Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 110 F10 121 Page Up 85 112 Fll 122 Page Down 86 113 F12 123 Cursor Left 79 114 Print Screen 124 Cursor Right 89 115 Scroll Lock 125 Cursor Up 83 116 Pause 126 Cursor Down 84 117 Insert 75 Keypad Enter 108 118 Delete 76 Return 43 119 Home 80 Backspace 15 120 End 81 Tab 16 Is a delimiter Mod Function UDS UDS Direction Is an integer that specifies the modifier key that is to be pressed at the same time as the defined key Dor none Normal 3 Control 1 Normal 6 Shift Control 2 Shift 7 Alt Control 3 Alt 8 Alt Control Shift 4 Alt Shift Is a number associated with a local function as listed below For example function number 0 makes the key or key modifier inoperative Function number 100 indicates a user defined sequence UDS and a UDS direction is defined following the slash delimiter 0 No Function 91 Backspace 93 Escape 100 UDS 92 Cancel 94 Delete Is the user defined sequence specified in Hex format Each hex code in this string represents a value transmitted by the defined key combined with the modifiers Specifies the transmission direction Oornone Normal Host and or terminal default 1 Local Terminal only 2 Remote Host only C 11 Host Command Summary ANSI VT420 Emulati
327. xit on connection close fail ExitOnClose off E1 Reconnect on close fail ExitOnClose Connect E2 New session warning message SessionWarning oft OS Close connection on exit WarnExit off J Session Configuration Command Function Registry Entry Command Line Start up command group to action none Ngroupname Session configuration to use none SE description Disable bell Bell off BE Enable debug Capture Replay none Debug Enable debug log send receive none Debug2Way Display Command Function Registry Entry Command Line Window minimized on start up WindowSize minimized MI Window maximized on start up WindowSize maximized MZ Window full screen on start up WindowSize FullScreen F Disable window frame resize none WF Title to display in title bar none T title Subtitle to display in title bar none ST subtitle Disable title bar none TB Disable Min Max amp Close buttons none SY Disable Minimize button MinimizeBox off MN Disable Maximize button MaximizeBox off MX Disable Close button MenuCloseItem off MT Disable System menu SystemMenu off none Disable System amp Min Max SystemMenu none none Disable Command bar CommandBar off CB Disable Command bar CmdBarTools 0 MA Disable tool buttons on cmd bar CmdBarTools 1 TB Disable toolbar none L Disable menu bar pop ups toolbar none CB1 15 2 Initialization Commands Disa
328. y ESC 16h Edit key waits for host to enable mode change ESC 161 Enable all selected areas to be transmitted ESC 15h Enable only cursor area to be transmitted ESC 151 Enable transmission of all characters ESC 17h Enable transmission of protected areas ESC 1h Enable transmission of selected characters only ESC 171 End of block indicator character s ESC 0 no 1 FF 2 ETX 3 EOT 4 CR 5 DCH End selected area ESC G Enter edit mode ESC 10h Enter interactive mode ESC 101 Function according to ANSI rules ESC 531 Function as VT131 terminal ESC 53h Line termination characters ASCH decimal ESC s Space compression mode off ESC 131 Space compression mode on ESC 13h Start selected area ESCF Transmission occurs immediately ESC 14h Transmission waits for host ESC 141 Transmit block of data ESC 5 Transmit scrolling region ESC 16h Transmit VT131 or ANSI partial page ESC 161 PRINTING Auto print off ESC 4i Auto print on ESC 5i Form feed at end of print ESC 18h No form feed at end of print ESC 181 Print controller on ESC 5i Print controller off ESC 4i C 5 Host Command Summary Print cursor line ESC 1i Print page ESC i Print page prints complete page ESC 19h Print page prints scrolling region only ESC 191 REPORTS Report compatibility level ESC gt c Report current colour ESC M Report cursor position ESC 6n Report keyboard nationality ESC 26n Report operating status
329. y Function Virtual Key Name C1 C4 DG_C1 DG CA Home DG_HOME Cursor Type DG_CURSOR Keypad Comma DG_COMMA Cursor Down DG_DOWN Keypad Enter DG_ENTER Cursor Left DG_LEFT Keypad Minus DG_MINUS Cursor Right DG_RIGHT Local Print DG_LOCALPRINT Cursor Up DG_UP New Line DG_NEWLINE Erase Line DG_ERASELINE Normal Compressed DG_SPACING Erase Page DG_ERASEPAGE Print DG_PRINT Fl F15 DG_F1 DG_F15 Scroll Rate DG_SCROLLRATE Hold DG_HOLD A 2 Virtual Key Names HP 700 92 96 Virtual Key Names Key Function Backspace Clear Display Clear Line Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Cursor Up Delete Delete Character Delete Line Delete Wrap Enter Escape F1 F8 Home Cursor Home Cursor Shift Insert Character Insert Line Virtual Key Name HP_BACKSPACE HP_CLEARMEM HP_CLEARLINE HP_DOWN HP_LEFT HP_RIGHT HP_UP HP_DELETE HP_DELETECHAR HP_DELETELINE HP_DELETEWRAP HP_SEND HP_ESCAPE HP_F1 HP_F8 HP_HOMEUP HP_HOMEDOWN HP_INSERTMODE HP_INSERTLINE Key Function Insert Wrap Menu Next Page Previous Page Print Return Scroll Down Scroll Up Select Tab Tab Shifted User System Mode Sel Keys User Keys Mode User Key Def Menu Soft Reset Hard Reset Virtual Key Name HP_INSERTWRAP HP_MENU HP_NEXTPAGE HP_PREVPAGE HP_PRINT HP_RETURN HP_ROLLDOWN HP_ROLLUP HP_SELECT HP_TAB HP_BACKTAB HP_SYSTEM HP_MODES HP_USER HP_FKEYDEFS HP_SOFTRESET HP_HARDRESET A 3 Virtual Key Names IBM 3270 Vi
330. ze of 260 bytes Status Border Factory default Selected This option enables you to display a thin border which separates the status line from the rest of the lines on the display 6 35 Setup Menus Telserv Format Factory default Selected The setting of this option determines how network data is treated When selected data will be treated in Tandem network server Telserv format When unselected data will be treated in serial format Return Function Factory default Unselected This option specifies whether or not the function of the Enter key is defined by the application when in Block mode When selected the key is regarded as an application specific function key Normally this should be unselected Bell On Factory default Selected This option enables or disables an audible tone which is heard when the emulation warns you about something This needs to be selected when you want to use the Bell Column feature Bell Column Factory default 0 This option enables you to specify a particular column on the display which will cause an audible warning to sound when the cursor passes through it The valid range of column numbers is 1 to 80 Setting this option to 0 will disable the feature The Bell On option must be selected for this feature to work 6 36 Setup Menus IBM 3270 Settings IBM 3270 Settings xl IDM 3270 Model E to Left Options f2278 2 D T Numeral Swap I Symbol Swap r Rul

Terminal Emulation User's Guide (XPe)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents